owners manual - az685612.vo.msecnd.netaz685612.vo.msecnd.net/.../v70_xc70_ownersmanual_en.pdf ·...

V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:19:58+01:00; henrikrosenqvist

VOLVO V70 & XC70

Owners Manual

DEAR VOLVO OWNERTHANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in yourVolvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort ofyou and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in theworld. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all currentsafety and environmental requirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommendthat you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructionsand maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.

V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 1henrikrosenqvist

Table of contents

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

0000 IntroductionImportant information................................. 6Volvo and the environment......................... 9

0101 SafetySeatbelts .................................................. 14Airbag system (SRS - Airbag)................... 17Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 20Side airbags (SIPS bags) ......................... 22Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... 24WHIPS ...................................................... 25When the systems deploy ........................ 27Safety mode.............................................. 28Child safety............................................... 29 02

02 Locks and alarmRemote control key/key blade.................. 40Privacy locking*......................................... 45Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*......................................................... 46Keyless drive*............................................ 48Locking/unlocking..................................... 50Child safety locks...................................... 55Alarm*........................................................ 56


Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

0303 Your driving environmentInstruments and controls.......................... 62Key positions............................................ 71Seats......................................................... 72Steering wheel.......................................... 76Lighting..................................................... 77Wipers and washing.................................. 86Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 89Power sunroof*......................................... 93Starting the engine.................................... 95Starting the engine – Flexifuel................... 97Starting the engine – external battery....... 99Gearboxes............................................... 100All-wheel drive – AWD*........................... 104Foot brake............................................... 105Hill Descent Control (HDC)..................... 107Parking brake.......................................... 109

HomeLink EU*....................................... 112

0404 Comfort and driving pleasureMenus and messages............................. 118Climate control........................................ 123Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas-senger compartment heater*.................. 131Fuel-driven additional heater*................. 134Audio system.......................................... 135RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system -Dual Screen* .......................................... 147Trip computer......................................... 152Compass*............................................... 154DSTC – Stability and traction control sys-tem.......................................................... 155Adapting driving characteristics............. 156Cruise control*........................................ 157Adaptive cruise control*.......................... 158Distance Alert.......................................... 164Collision Warning with Auto Brake*........ 167Driver Alert System – DAC*..................... 172Driver Alert System - LDW*..................... 175Park Assist*............................................. 178BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System. . 181Comfort inside the passenger compart-ment........................................................ 185Bluetooth handsfree*.............................. 188Built-in phone*........................................ 193

0505 During your journeyRecommendations during driving........... 200Refuelling................................................ 202Fuel......................................................... 203Loading................................................... 206Cargo area.............................................. 209Warning triangle*..................................... 213Driving with a trailer................................ 214Towing and recovery.............................. 219


Table of contents

4

0606 Maintenance and

specificationsEngine compartment............................... 224Lamps..................................................... 229Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 236Battery..................................................... 238Fuses....................................................... 241Wheels and tyres.................................... 249Car care.................................................. 263Type designations................................... 267Specifications......................................... 269Type approval......................................... 282 07

07 Alphabetical IndexAlphabetical Index.................................. 283


Table of contents

5


Introduction

Important information

6

Reading the Owner's Manual

IntroductionA good way of getting to know your new car isto read the owner's manual, ideally before yourfirst journey. This will give you the opportunityto familiarise yourself with new functions, tosee how best to handle the car in different sit-uations, and to make the best use of all thecar's features. Please pay attention to thesafety instructions contained in the manual.

The equipment described in the owner's man-ual is not present in all cars. In addition tostandard equipment, this manual alsodescribes options (factory fitted equipment)and certain accessories (retrofitted extraequipment). If you are uncertain over what isstandard or option/accessory then contactyour Volvo dealer.

Volvo cars are adapted for the varying require-ments of different markets, as well as fornational or local legal requirements and regu-lations.

The specifications, design features and illus-trations in this owner's manual are not binding.We reserve the right to make modificationswithout prior notice.

© Volvo Car Corporation

OptionAll types of option/accessory are marked withan asterisk .

The range of options/accessories for the dif-ferent car models varies depending on the mar-ket. The majority of options are factory fittedand cannot be retrofitted, accessories are ret-rofitted.

Contact your authorised Volvo dealer for moreinformation.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts advise of a risk of personalinjury.

IMPORTANT

Important texts advise of a risk of materialdamage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitatethe use of features and functions for exam-ple.

FootnoteThere is footnote information in the owner'smanual that is located at the bottom of thepage. This information is an addition to the textthat it refers to via a number. If the footnoterefers to text in a table then letters are usedinstead of numbers for referral.

Message textsThere are displays in the car that show textmessages. These text messages are high-lighted in the owner's manual by means of thetext being slightly larger and printed in grey.Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-sage texts on the information display (e.g.Audio settings).

DecalsThe car contains different types of decal whichare designed to convey important informationin a simple and clear manner. The decals in thecar have the following descending degree ofimportance for the warning/information.


Introduction


7

Warning for personal injury

G031596

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,white text/image on black message field. Usedto indicate the presence of danger which, if thewarning is ignored, may result in serious per-sonal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

G031597

White ISO symbols and white text/image onblack or blue warning field and message field.Used to indicate the presence of danger which,if the warning is ignored, may result in damageto property.

Information

G031600

White ISO symbols and white text/image onblack message field.

Procedure listsProcedures where action must be taken in acertain sequence are numbered in the owner'smanual.

When there is a series of illustrations forstep-by-step instructions each step isnumbered in the same way as the corres-ponding illustration.

There are numbered lists with letters adja-cent to the series of illustrations where theorder of the instructions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnum-bered and are used to illustrate a move-ment.


Introduction


8

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions then the different steps arenumbered with normal numbers.

Position listsRed circles containing a number are usedin overview images where different com-ponents are pointed out. The numberrecurs in the position list featured in con-nection with the illustration that describesthe item.

Bulleted listsA bulleted list is used when there is a list ofpoints in the owner's manual.

Example:

• Coolant

• Engine oil

To be continuedThis symbol is located furthest down to the

right when a section continues on the nextdouble-page spread.

Recording dataOne or more of the computers in your Volvo arecapable of recording detailed information. Thisinformation is intended for use in research toenhance safety and for diagnosing faults insome of the in-car systems. The data mayinclude details regarding seatbelt use by thedriver and passengers, the functions of variousvehicle systems and modules, and status infor-mation about the engine, throttle, steering,brakes and other systems. This data can alsoinclude details of the way the car is driven. Thistype of information can include, without beinglimited to, specific details such as vehiclespeed, the use of the brake and acceleratorpedals and steering wheel position. This lattertype of data can be stored for a limited periodwhile the car is being driven and subsequentlyduring a collision or a near-collision. Volvo CarCorporation will not disclose the stored infor-mation without consent. However, Volvo CarCorporation may be forced to disclose theinformation due to national legislation. VolvoCar Corporation and its authorised workshopsmay also read and use the information.

Accessories and extra equipmentThe incorrect connection and installation ofaccessories can negatively affect the car'selectrical system. Certain accessories onlyfunction when their associated software isinstalled in the car's computer system. Alwayscontact an authorised Volvo workshop beforeinstalling accessories which are connected toor affect the electrical system.

Information on the InternetAt www.volvocars.com there is further infor-mation concerning your car.


Introduction

Volvo and the environment


Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy

G00

0000

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-ration's core values which influence all opera-tions. We also believe that our customers shareour consideration for the environment.

Your Volvo complies with strict internationalenvironmental standards and is also manufac-tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-ration has global ISO certification, whichincludes the environmental standard ISO14001 covering all factories and several of ourother units. We also set requirements for ourpartners so that they work systematically withenvironmental issues.

EPI (Environmental Product Information) issupplied for all Volvo models. Here you can seehow the environment is affected during theentire lifecycle of the car.

Read more at www.volvocars.com/EPI.

Fuel consumptionVolvo cars have competitive fuel consumptionin each of their respective classes. Lower fuelconsumption generally results in lower emis-sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.

It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-sumption. For more information read under theheading, Reducing environmental impact.

Efficient emission controlYour Volvo is manufactured following the con-cept "Clean inside and out" – a concept thatencompasses a clean interior environment aswell as highly efficient emission control. Inmany cases the exhaust emissions are wellbelow the applicable standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartmentA passenger compartment filter prevents dustand pollen from entering the passenger com-partment via the air intake.

A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-


Introduction


10

ing air is cleaner than the air in the trafficoutside.

The system consists of an electronic sensorand a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-tored continuously and if there is an increasein the level of certain unhealthy gases such ascarbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,queues and tunnels for example.

The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozoneand hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbonfilter.

Textile standardThe interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-sant and comfortable, even for people withcontact allergies and for asthma sufferers.Extreme attention has been given to choosingenvironmentally-compatible materials. Thismeans that they also fulfil the requirements inthe Oeko-Tex 100 standard 1, a major advancetowards a healthier passenger compartmentenvironment.

Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car-pets and fabrics for example. The leather in theupholstery undergoes chromium-free tanningwith plant substances and fulfils the certifica-tion requirements.

Volvo workshops and the environmentRegular maintenance creates the conditionsfor a long service life and low fuel consumptionfor your car. In this way you contribute to acleaner environment. When Volvo's workshopsare entrusted with the service and mainte-nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-tem. We make clear demands regarding theway in which our workshops are designed inorder to prevent spills and discharges into theenvironment. Our workshop staff have theknowledge and the tools required to guaranteegood environmental care.

Reducing environmental impactYou can easily help reduce environmentalimpact, for example, by driving economicallyand by servicing and maintaining the caraccording to the instructions in the owner'smanual.

The following advice will help you to do your bitfor the environment: (for further advice on howyou can reduce environmental impact anddrive economically, see pages 262, 200).

• Decrease fuel consumption by choosingECO tyre pressure, see page 262.

• A roof load and ski box increase air resis-tance, leading to higher fuel consumption.Remove them directly after use.

• Remove unnecessary items from the car.The greater the load the higher the fuelconsumption.

• If the car is equipped with an engine blockheater, always use it before starting fromcold. This reduces fuel consumption andexhaust emissions.

• Drive gently and avoid braking too hard.

• Drive in the highest gear possible. Lowengine speeds result in lower fuel con-sumption.

• Use engine braking to slow down.

• Avoid letting the engine idle. Pay attentionto local regulations. Switch off the enginewhen stationary for longer periods.

• Always dispose of environmentally hazar-dous waste, such as batteries and oils, inan environmentally safe manner. If uncer-tain about disposal, consult an authorisedVolvo workshop for advice.

• Service your car regularly.

• High speed increases consumption con-siderably due to increased wind resis-tance. A doubling of speed increases windresistance 4 times.

These hints will help reduce fuel consumptionwithout increasing travel time or lessening theenjoyment of driving. Apart from being kind to

1 More information on www.oekotex.com


Introduction


11

your car, you'll be saving money - and theEarth's resources.


G02

0871


Seatbelts ................................................................................................ 14Airbag system (SRS - Airbag)................................................................. 17Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 20Side airbags (SIPS bags) ....................................................................... 22Inflatable Curtain (IC) .............................................................................. 24WHIPS .................................................................................................... 25When the systems deploy ...................................................................... 27Safety mode............................................................................................ 28Child safety............................................................................................. 29


01SAFETY


01 Safety

Seatbelts01


General information

G02

0995

Heavy braking can have serious consequencesif the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that allpassengers use their seatbelts.

It is important that the seatbelt lies against thebody so it can provide maximum protection.Do not lean the backrest too far back. Theseatbelt is designed to protect in a normalseating position.

Putting on a seatbeltPull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it bypressing the buckle into the lock. A loud "click"indicates that the seatbelt has locked.

The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rearseat*.

Releasing the seatbeltPress the red lock button and then let the seat-belt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully,feed the seatbelt in by hand so that it does nothang loose.

The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:

• if it is pulled out too quickly.

• during braking and acceleration.

• if the car leans heavily.

Keep in mind the following:• do not use clips or anything else that can

prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.

• ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted orcaught on anything.

• the hip strap must be positioned low down(not over the abdomen).

• tension the hip strap over the lap by pullingthe diagonal shoulder belt as in the pre-ceding illustration.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-belt is not used or is used incorrectly, thismay diminish the protection provided by theairbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-son.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-self. Contact an authorised Volvo work-shop.

If a seatbelt has been subjected to a majorload, such as in conjunction with a collision,the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Someof the protective characteristics of the seat-belt may have been lost, even if it appearsto be undamaged. In addition, replace theseatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. Thenew seatbelt must be type-approved andintended for installation in the same positionas the replaced seatbelt.


01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

15

Seatbelts and pregnancy

G02

0998

The seatbelt should always be worn duringpregnancy. But it is then crucial that it be wornin the correct way. The diagonal section shouldwrap over the shoulder then be routed betweenthe breasts and to the side of the abdomen.

The lap section should lay flat over the thighsand as low as possible under the abdomen. –It must never be allowed to ride upward.Remove all slack from the seatbelt and ensurethat it fits close to the body. In addition, checkthat there are no twists in the seatbelt.

As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant driversshould adjust their seats and steering wheelsuch that they can easily maintain control of thevehicle as they drive (which means that theymust be able to easily operate the foot pedalsand steering wheel). They should strive to posi-

tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-ble between their abdomen and the steeringwheel.

Seatbelt reminder

G01

7726

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fastentheir seatbelts by means of an audio and visualreminder. The audio reminder is speeddependent, and in some cases time depend-ent. The visual reminder is located in the roofconsole and the combined instrument panel.

Child seats are not covered by the seatbeltreminder system.

Rear seatThe seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has twosubfunctions:

• Provides information on which seatbeltsare being used in the rear seat. The mes-sage is shown in the information displaywhen the seatbelts are being used or whena rear door is opened. The message isautomatically cleared after approx. 30 sec-onds or can be acknowledged manually bypressing the direction indicator lever'sREAD button.

• Provides a warning if one of the rear seat-belts is unfastened during travel. Thiswarning takes the form of a message onthe information display along with theaudio/visual signal. The warning stopswhen the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it canalso be acknowledged manually by press-ing the READ button.

The message on the information display show-ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail-able. Press the READ button to see storedmessages.

Certain marketsAn acoustic signal and indicator lamp remindthe driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one.At low speed, the audio reminder will sound forthe first 6 seconds.


01 Safety

Seatbelts01

16

Seatbelt tensionerAll the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten-sioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensionertightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi-ciently violent collision. The seatbelt then pro-vides more effective restraint for the occu-pants.


01 Safety

Airbag system (SRS - Airbag) 01

17

Warning symbol on the combinedinstrument panel

o0 1

G02

1010

The airbag system is continuously monitoredby the system's control module. The warningsymbol in the combined instrument panel illu-minates when the remote control key is in posi-tion II or III. The symbol goes out after approx.6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault-free.

WARNING

If the warning symbol for the airbag systemremains illuminated or illuminates while driv-ing, it means that the airbag system doesnot have full functionality. The symbol indi-cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys-tem, SIPS, the IC system or another fault inthe SRS system. Contact an authorisedVolvo workshop immediately.

As well as the warning symbol, a message mayappear on the information display in appropri-ate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions,the warning triangle illuminates and SRSairbag Service required or SRS AirbagService urgent appears in the display. Con-tact an authorised Volvo workshop immedi-ately.

Overview, airbag system

G01

8665

SRS system, left-hand drive.

G01

8666

SRS system, right-hand drive.

The SRS system consists of airbags and sen-sors. A sufficiently violent collision trips thesensors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot


01 Safety

Airbag system (SRS - Airbag)01

18

gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflateswhen compressed. When this occurs, smokeescapes into the car. This is completely nor-mal. The entire process, including inflation anddeflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths ofa second.

WARNING

Repairs must only be performed by anauthorised Volvo workshop. Any interfer-ence in the airbag system could cause mal-function and result in serious personalinjury.

NOTE

The sensors react differently depending onthe course of the collision and whether ornot the seatbelts on the driver and passen-ger side are used.

It is therefore possible that only one (ornone) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-sion. The airbag system senses the force ofthe collision on the car and adapts accord-ingly so that one or more airbags aredeployed.

The capacity of the airbags is also adaptedto the collision force to which the vehicle issubjected.

G02

1013

Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-hand drive car.

G02

1014

Location of the front passenger airbag in a right-hand drive car.

Airbag on the driver's side

G02

1011

The car has an SRS airbag (SupplementalRestraint System) on the driver's side to sup-plement the protection afforded by the seat-belt. This airbag is fitted into the centre of thesteering wheel. The steering wheel is markedSRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-belt is not used or is used incorrectly, thismay diminish the protection provided by theairbag in the event of a collision.


01 Safety

Airbag system (SRS - Airbag) 01

19

Passenger airbag

G02

1837

The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-ger side. This airbag is folded up into acompartment above the glovebox. Its coverpanel is marked SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbagdeploys, passengers must sit as upright aspossible with their feet on the floor andbacks against the backrest. Seatbelts mustbe secured.

WARNING

Do not put objects in front of or above thedashboard where the passenger airbag islocated.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion in the front seat if the airbagis activated 1.

Never allow a child to stand or sit in front ofthe front passenger seat. No one shorterthan 140 cm should ever sit in the front pas-senger seat if the airbag is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given abovecould endanger the life of the child.

Label Airbag

G03

2244

Label for airbag located on door pillar.

1 For information on how to activate/deactivate the airbag, see page 20


01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag*01


Key switch off - PACOS

General informationThe airbag for the front passenger seat can bedeactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). Forinformation on how to activate/deactivate, seeunder the heading Activating/deactivating.

Key switch off/switchThe switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)is located on the passenger end of the instru-ment panel and is accessible when the pas-senger door is open, (see under the followingheading, "Switch – PACOS"). Check that theswitch is in the required position. Volvo rec-ommends that the remote control key's keyblade be used to change position.

For information on the key blade, seepage 43.

WARNING

Failure to follow the advice given abovecould endanger the life of passengers in thecar.

WARNING

If the car is equipped with a front passengerairbag, but has no switch (PACOS, Passen-ger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbagis always activated.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion in the front seat if the airbag

is activated and the symbol in theroof console is illuminated. Failure to followthis advice could endanger the life of thechild.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-senger seat if the message in the roof panel(see page 21) indicates that the airbag isdeactivated and if the warning symbol forthe airbag system is also displayed in thecombined instrument panel. This indicatesthat there has been a severe malfunction.Contact an authorised Volvo workshopimmediately.

Activating/deactivating

G01

9030

Switch location.

The airbag is activated. With the switch inthis position, persons taller than 140 cmcan sit in the front passenger seat, butnever children in a child seat or on abooster cushion.

The airbag is deactivated. With the switchin this position, children in a child seat oron a booster cushion can sit in the frontpassenger seat, but never persons tallerthan 140 cm.


01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01


WARNING

Activated airbag (passenger seat):

Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion on the front passenger seatwhen the airbag is activated. This applies toeveryone shorter than 140 cm.

Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):

No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit inthe front passenger seat when the airbag isdeactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given abovecould endanger life.

Messages

2

2

G01

7724

Indicator in the roof console showing that the pas-senger airbag is deactivated.

A text message and a symbol in the roof panelindicate that the airbag for the front passengerseat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).

G01

7800

Indicator in the roof console showing that the pas-senger airbag is activated.

A warning symbol in the roof panel indicatesthat the airbag for the front passenger seat isactivated (see preceding illustration).

NOTE

When the remote control key is turned toignition position II or III the warning symbolfor the airbag is shown in the combinedinstrument panel for approx. 6 seconds (seepage 17).

Following which, the indicator in the roofconsole is illuminated showing the correctstatus for the front passenger seat airbag.For more information on the remote controlkey's different ignition positions, seepage 71.


01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags)01

22

Side airbag

G02

0694

In a side impact collision a large proportion ofthe collision force is transferred by the SIPS(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-lars, the floor, the roof and other structuralparts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-er's and front passenger seats protect thechest area and the hip and are an importantpart of the SIPS.

The SIPS bag system consists of two maincomponents, side airbag and sensors. Theside airbags are located in the front seat backr-ests.

WARNING

• Repairs must only be performed by anauthorised Volvo workshop. Any inter-ference in the SIPS bag system couldcause malfunction and result in seriouspersonal injury.

• Do not put objects in the area betweenthe outside of the seat and the doorpanel, since this area is required by theside airbag.

• Use only seat covers approved byVolvo. Other seat covers may impedethe operation of the side airbags.

• The side airbag is a supplement to theseatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Child seats and side airbagsThe protection provided by the car to childrenseated in a child seat or on a booster cushionis not diminished by the side airbag.

A child seat or booster cushion can be placedon the front passenger seat provided that thecar does not have an activated 1 passengerairbag.

Location

G02

4377

Driver's seat, left-hand drive.

G02

4378

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.

The SIPS bag system consists of side airbagsand sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips

1 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 20.


01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

23

the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.The airbag inflates between the occupant andthe door panel and thereby cushions the initialimpact. The airbag deflates when compressedby the collision. The side airbag is normally onlydeployed on the side of the collision.

Label

G03

2254

Label for side airbag located on door pillar.


01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain (IC)01

24

Properties

G01

7675

The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is asupplement to the SIPS and SRS airbags. It isfitted in the headlining along both sides of theroof and protects the car's outer seats. A suf-ficiently violent collision trips the sensors andthe inflatable curtain is inflated. The inflatablecurtain helps to prevent the driver and passen-gers from striking their heads on the inside ofthe car during a collision.

WARNING

Never hang or attach heavy items onto thehandles in the roof. The hook is onlydesigned for light clothing (not for solidobjects such as umbrellas for example).

Do not screw or install anything onto thecar's headlining, door pillars or side panels.This could compromise the intended pro-tection. Only ever use Volvo genuine partsthat are approved for placement in theseareas.

WARNING

Do not load the car higher than 50 mm underthe top edge of the side windows. Other-wise, the intended protection of the inflat-able curtain, which is concealed in theheadlining, may be compromised.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to theseatbelts.

Always use a seatbelt.


01 Safety

WHIPS 01

25

Protection against whiplash injury –WHIPS

G02

1018

The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-cially designed head restraints in the frontseats. The system is actuated by a rear-endcollision, where the angle and speed of the col-lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle allhave an influence.

WARNING

The WHIPS system is a supplement to theseatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Properties of the seatWhen the WHIPS system is deployed, the frontseat backrests are lowered backward to alterthe seating position of the driver and front seatpassenger. This reduces the risk of whiplashinjury.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPSsystem yourself. Contact an authorisedVolvo workshop.

WHIPS system and child seats/cushionsThe protection provided by the car to childrenseated in a child seat or on a booster cushionis not diminished by the WHIPS system.

Correct seating positionFor the best possible protection, the driver andfront seat passenger should sit in the centre ofthe seat with as little space as possiblebetween the head and the head restraint.

WARNING

If a seat has been subjected to extremeforces, such as due to a rear-end collision,the WHIPS system must be checked by anauthorised Volvo workshop.

Part of the WHIPS system's protectivecapacity may have been lost even if theseats appear to be undamaged. Contact anauthorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-tem checked even after a minor rear-endcollision.


01 Safety

WHIPS01

26

Do not obstruct the WHIPS system

G02

1842

Objects behind driver's/passenger seat.

WARNING

Do not squeeze rigid objects between therear seat cushion and the front seat back-rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct thefunction of the WHIPS system.

G01

8567

Objects in the rear seat.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is folded down, thecorresponding front seat must be movedforward so that it does not touch the foldedbackrest.


01 Safety

When the systems deploy 01

27

When the systems deploy

System Triggered

Seatbelt tensioner,front seat

In a frontal collisionand or side-impactaccident and orrear-end collision

Seatbelt tensioner,rear seat

In a frontal collision

Airbags (SRS) In a frontal colli-sionA

Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impactaccidentA

Inflatable Curtain IC In a side-impactaccidentA

Whiplash protectionWHIPS

In a rear-end colli-sion

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a col-lision without airbag deployment. A number of factors suchas the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of thecar, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the differentsafety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags have deployed, the following isrecommended:

• Have the car transported to an authorisedVolvo workshop. Do not drive withdeployed airbags.

• Let an authorised Volvo workshop replacecomponents in the car's safety system.

• Always contact a doctor.

NOTE

The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys-tems are deployed only once during a colli-sion.

WARNING

The airbag control module is located in thecentre console. If the centre console isdrenched with water or other liquid, discon-nect the battery cables. Do not attempt tostart the car since the airbags may deploy.Have the car transported to an authorisedVolvo workshop.

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. Theycan make steering difficult. Other safetysystems may also be damaged. The smokeand dust created when the airbags aredeployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case ofirritation, wash with cold water. The rapiddeployment sequence and airbag fabricmay cause friction and skin burns.


01 Safety

Safety mode01

28

Reduced functionality

G02

1062

If the car is involved in a collision, the textSafety mode See manual may appear on theinformation display. This means that the carhas reduced functionality. Safety mode is aprotective state that is enforced when the col-lision may have damaged any of the car's vitalfunctions, such as the fuel lines, sensors forone of the safety systems, or the brake system.

Attempting to start the carFirst, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.There must be no smell of fuel either.

If everything seems normal and you havechecked for indications of fuel leakage, youmay attempt to start the car.

Firstly, remove the remote control key and thenreinsert it. The car's electronics will then try to

reset themselves to normal mode. Then try tostart the car. If the message Safety mode Seemanual is still shown on the display then thecar must not be driven or towed, but a vehiclerecovery service used instead. Even if the carappears to be driveable, hidden damage maymake the car impossible to control once mov-ing.

Moving the carIf Normal mode is shown after Safety modeSee manual has been reset, the car can bemoved carefully out of a dangerous position.Do not move the car further than necessary.

WARNING

Never attempt to repair your car or reset theelectronics yourself if the car has been insafety mode. This could result in personalinjury or the car not functioning as normal.Always allow an authorised Volvo workshopto check and restore the car to normal sta-tus after Safety mode See manual hasbeen displayed.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt torestart the car if it smells of fuel when theSafety mode message is displayed. Leavethe car at once.

WARNING

If the car is in safety mode it must not betowed. It must be transported to an author-ised Volvo workshop.


01 Safety

Child safety 01

29

Children should sit comfortably andsafelyThe position of a child in the car and the choiceof equipment are dictated by the child's weightand size, for more information, see page 30.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement ofchildren in cars vary from country to coun-try. Check what does apply.

Children of all ages and sizes must always sitcorrectly secured in the car. Never allow a childto sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo's own child safety equipment isdesigned for your car. Use Volvo genuineequipment to best ensure that the mountingpoints and attachments are correctly posi-tioned and are sufficiently strong.

NOTE

In the event of questions when fitting childsafety products, contact the manufacturerfor clearer instructions.

Child seats

G02

0739

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

Volvo has child safety products that aredesigned for and tested by Volvo.

NOTE

When using child safety products it isimportant to read the installation instruc-tions included.

Do not attach the straps for the child seat tothe horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails orbeams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam-age the straps.

Allow the back of the child seat to rest againstthe dashboard. This applies to cars without a

passenger airbag, or where the airbag is deac-tivated.

Location of child seatsYou may place:

• a child seat/booster cushion on the pas-senger seat, provided the passenger air-bag is not activated 1.

• a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat thatuses the passenger seat backrest as sup-port.

Always place a child in the rear seat if the pas-senger airbag is activated. A child sitting on thefront passenger seat could suffer serious injuryif the airbag deploys.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion in the front seat if the airbag(SRS) is activated.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sitin the front passenger seat if the airbag(SRS) is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given abovecould endanger the life of the child.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 20.


01 Safety

Child safety01

30

WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steelbraces or some other design that could reston the seatbelt buckle's opening buttonmust not be used, as they could cause theseatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not allow the upper section of the childseat to rest against the windscreen.

Label Airbag

Label located on instrument panel end face on thepassenger side.

Recommended child seats 2

Weight/Age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg

(0 – 9 months)

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo Child seat – rear-facing childseat, secured with the car's seatbeltand straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo Child seat – rear-facing childseat, secured with the car's seatbelt,straps and support legs.


Britax Baby Safe Plus – rear-facingchild seat, secured with the ISOFIX fix-ture system.


Britax Baby Safe Plus – rear-facingchild seat, secured with the ISOFIXfixture system.


Britax Baby Safe Plus – rear-facingchild seat, secured with the car'sseatbelt.


2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.


01 Safety

Child safety 01


Weight/Age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 1

9-18 kg

(9-36 months)

Volvo Child seat – rear-facing childseat, secured with the car's seatbeltand straps.


Volvo Child seat – rear-facing childseat, secured with the car's seatbelt,straps and support legs.


Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat,secured with the ISOFIX fixture systemand straps.


Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat,secured with the ISOFIX fixture sys-tem and straps.


Group 2/3

15-36 kg

(3-12 yr)

Volvo Booster cushion – with or withoutbackrest.


Volvo Booster cushion – with or with-out backrest.


Volvo Booster cushion – with or with-out backrest.


Volvo 2-stage Integrated boostercushion – available as a factory fittedoption.



01 Safety

Child safety01

32

Integrated two-stage boostercushions*

G01

7875

Correct position, the seatbelt is positioned abovethe shoulder.

G01

7719

Incorrect position, the head must not be posi-tioned above the head restraint and the seatbeltmust not be below the shoulder.

The booster cushions are specially designed toprovide optimum safety. In combination withthe seatbelt they are approved for children whoweigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are 95to 140 cm in height.

Check before driving that:

• the 2-stage integrated booster cushion iscorrectly set (see table below) and inlocked position

• the seatbelt is in contact with the child'sbody and is not slack or twisted

• the seatbelt does not lie across the child'sthroat or below the shoulder (see preced-ing illustrations)

• the lap section of the seatbelt is positionedlow over the pelvis to provide optimal pro-tection.

Stage 1 Stage 2

Weight 22 - 36 kg 15 – 25 kg

Length 115 - 140 cm 95 - 120 cm

For instructions on adjusting the booster cush-ion's two levels, see pages 32–33.

Raising the two-stage booster cushion

Stage 1

G01

7696

Pull the handle forward and up in order torelease the booster cushion.

G01

7697


01 Safety

Child safety 01

33

Press the booster cushion backwards tolock.

Stage 2

G01

7783

Start from the lower stage. Press the but-ton.

G01

7784

Lift the booster cushion up at the front edgeand press it back against the backrest to lock.

WARNING

Repair or replacement should only be per-formed by an authorised Volvo workshop.Do not make any modifications or additionsto the booster cushion. If an integratedbooster cushion has been subjected to amajor load, such as in conjunction with acollision, the entire booster cushion must bereplaced. Even if the booster cushionappears to be undamaged, it may not affordthe same level of protection. The boostercushion must also be replaced if it is heavilyworn.

NOTE

It is not possible to adjust the booster cush-ion from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first bereset by being fully folded into the seatcushion. Refer to the heading below, Low-ering the two-stage booster cushion.

Lowering the two-stage booster cushionLowering can take place from both the upperand lower stage to fully lowered position in thecushion. However, it is not possible to adjust

the booster cushion from the upper stage tothe lower stage.

G01

7692

Pull the handle forwards to release thecushion.

G01

7694


01 Safety

Child safety01

34

Press down with your hand in the centre ofthe cushion in order to lock it.

WARNING

If the instructions regarding the two-stagebooster cushion are not followed then thiscould cause serious injury to a child in theevent of an accident.

IMPORTANT

Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.toys) left behind in the space under thecushion before lowering.

NOTE

The booster cushion must be lowered firstwhen lowering the backrest.

Child safety locks, rear doorsThe controls for operating the rear door powerwindows and the rear door opening handlescan be blocked from opening from the inside.For more information, see page 55.

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats

G02

1064

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture systemare concealed behind the lower section of therear seat backrest, in the outer seats.

The location of the mounting points is indicatedby symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre-ceding illustration).

Press the seat cushion down to access themounting points.

NOTE

The ISOFIX fixture system is an accessoryfor the passenger seat.

Always follow the manufacturer's installationinstructions when connecting a child seat tothe ISOFIX mounting points.

Size classesChild seats are in different sizes – cars are indifferent sizes. This means that not all childseats are suitable for all seats in all car models.

Consequently, a size classification has beenintroduced for child seats using the ISOFIX fix-ture system in order to assist users in choosingthe correct child seat (see the following table).

Sizeclass

Description

A Full size, front-facing childseat

B Reduced size (alt.1), front-facing child seat

B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-facing child seat

C Full size, rear-facing childseat

D Reduced size, rear-facingchild seat

E Rear-facing infant seat


01 Safety

Child safety 01

35

Sizeclass

Description

F Transverse infant seat, left-hand

G Transverse infant seat, right-hand

WARNING

Never place a child in the passenger seat ifthe car is equipped with an activated airbag.

NOTE

If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi-cation then the car model must be includedon the child seat's vehicle list.

NOTE

Contact a Volvo dealer for Volvo recom-mendations on ISOFIX child seats.

Types of ISOFIX child seat

Type of child seat Weight (Age) Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Infant seat transverse max. 10 kg (0 – 9 months) F - -

G - -

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 10 kg (0 – 9 months) E OK OK

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 13 kg (0 – 12 months) E OK OK

D OK OK

C - OK

Child seat, rear-facing 9 – 18 kg (9 – 36 months) D OK OK

C - OK


01 Safety

Child safety01

36

Type of child seat Weight (Age) Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Child seat, rear-facing 9 – 18 kg (9 – 36 months) B OKA OKA

B1 OKA OKA

A OKA OKA

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

Upper mounting points for child seatsG

0176

76

The car is equipped with upper mountingpoints for certain front-facing child seats.These mounting points are located on the rearof the seat.

The upper mounting points are primarilyintended for use with front-facing child seats.

Volvo recommends that small children shouldsit in rear-facing child seats to as late an ageas possible.

NOTE

For cars with folding head restraints on theoutside seats the head restraints should befolded to facilitate the installation of thistype of child seat.

NOTE

For cars equipped with a cargo area coverover the cargo area, this must be removedbefore a child seat can be fitted in themounting points.

For detailed information on how the child seatshould be tensioned in the upper mounting

points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc-tions.

WARNING

The child seat's straps must always berouted under the rear head restraints beforebeing tensioned at the mounting point.


01 Safety

01

37



Remote control key/key blade................................................................ 40Privacy locking*....................................................................................... 45Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*...................................... 46Keyless drive*.......................................................................................... 48Locking/unlocking................................................................................... 50Child safety locks.................................................................................... 55Alarm*...................................................................................................... 56


02LOCKS AND ALARM


02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

02

40

GeneralThe car is supplied with two remote controlkeys or two PCCs (Personal CarCommunicator). They are used to start the carand for locking and unlocking.

More remote control keys can be ordered – upto six can be programmed and used for thesame car.

The PCC has increased functionality com-pared with the remote control key. Only theremote control key is referred to in the remain-der of this chapter when describing functionsavailable in both the PCC and remote controlkey.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Always remember to switch off the powersupply to power windows and sunroof byremoving the remote control key if the driverleaves the car.

Detachable key bladeA remote control key contains a detachablemetal key blade for mechanical locking/unlocking of the driver's door, glovebox andtailgate (privacy locking).

For key blade functions, see page 43.

For privacy locking, see page 45.

The key blades' unique code is available atauthorised Volvo workshops, who can ordernew key blades.

Loss of a remote control keyIf you lose a remote control key then new onescan be ordered at an authorised Volvo work-shop. The remaining remote control keys mustthen be taken to the workshop. The code of themissing remote control key must be erasedfrom the system as a theft prevention measure.

The current number of keys registered to thecar can be checked under Car settings CarKey memory Number of keys. For adescription of the menu system, seepage 118.

Key memory – door mirrors and driver'sseatThe settings are automatically connected toeach respective remote control key, see pages72 and 90.

The function can be activated/deactivatedunder Car settings Car Key memorySeat & mirror positions. For a description ofthe menu system, see page 118.

For cars with Keyless drive function, seepage 48.

Indicator for locking/unlockingWhen the car is locked or unlocked using theremote control key, the direction indicatorsconfirm that locking/unlocking was correctlyperformed:

• Locking - one flash

• Unlocking - two flashes.

After locking the indication is only given if alllocks are activated once the doors have beenclosed.

The function can be activated/deactivatedunder Car settings Light settings Lockconfirmation light and Car settings Lightsettings Unlock confirmation light.

For a description of the menu system, seepage 118.

ImmobiliserEach remote control key has a unique code.The car can only be started with the correctremote control key with the correct code.

The following error messages in the combinedinstrument panel's information display are rela-ted to the electronic immobiliser:


02 Locks and alarm


02

41

Message Specification

Key error Try again Error reading remotecontrol key duringstart. Try to start thecar again.

Car key not found Applies only to thePCC's Keyless drivefunction. Errorsreading the PCCduring starting. Tryto start the caragain.

Immobiliser Trystart again

Remote control keyfunction error duringstart. If the fault per-sists; contact anauthorised Volvoworkshop.

For starting the car, see page 95.

Low battery in remote control keyThe batteries should be replaced if:

• the information symbol illuminates and Carkey Battery low is shown in the display

and/or

• the locks repeatedly do not react to signalsfrom the remote control key within20 metres from the car.

For changing the battery, see page 46.

Functions

G02

1078

Remote control key.

Locking

Unlocking

Approach light duration

Tailgate

Panic function

G02

1079

PCC* (Personal Car Communicator).

Information

Function buttonsLocking – Locks the doors and tailgate

and then activates the alarm.

Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tail-gate while the alarm is deactivated.

The function can be changed from unlockingall doors simultaneously, to opening the driv-er's door after one press of the button and,after a further press of the button - within 10seconds - opening the remaining doors.

The function is changed under Car settingsLock settings Doors unlock. For a

description of the menu system, seepage 118.


02 Locks and alarm


02


Approach lighting – Used to switch on thecar's lighting at a distance. For more informa-tion, see page 82.

Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the alarmfor the tailgate only 1. For more information, seepage 51.

Panic function – Used to attract attentionin an emergency.

Press and hold the red button for at least 3seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds toactivate the direction indicators and the horn.

The function can be turned off with the samebutton once it has been active for at least5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches offautomatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.

Global openingOne long press - at least 4 seconds - on button

or opens or closes all windows. Alsocloses the sunroof if open.

The function can be used to quickly air the carin hot weather for example.

WARNING

If the sunroof and windows are closed usingthe remote control key, check that no one isin danger of getting hands caught.

RangeThe remote control key has a range of up to20 m from the car.

NOTE

The remote control key functions can bedisrupted by surrounding radio waves,buildings, topographical conditions etc. Thecar can always be locked/unlocked usingthe key blade, see page 44.

Unique functions PCC*

G02

1080

Information button

Indicator lamps

Using the information button enables access tocertain information from the car via the indica-tor lamps.

Using the information buttonPress the information button .

All indicator lamps flash for approximately7 seconds and the light travels around onthe PCC. This indicates that the informa-tion from the car has been read.

If any of the other buttons are pressed dur-ing this time then the reading is interrupted.

NOTE

If none of the indicator lamps illuminateswith repeated use of the information buttonand in different locations (as well as after7 seconds and after the light has travelledaround on the PCC), contact an authorisedVolvo workshop.

Indicator lamps display information in accord-ance with the following illustration:

1 The tailgate opens on cars with automatic tailgate control.


02 Locks and alarm


02

43

G03

0262

Green continuous light – the car is locked.

Yellow continuous light – the car isunlocked.

Red light flashing alternately in the twoindicator lamps – indicates, using the HBS(Heart Beat Sensor) that someone may bein the car. This indication is only displayedif the alarm was triggered.

Red continuous light – the alarm has beentriggered.

RangeThe PCC lock functions have a range of up to20 m from the car.

The approach lighting, panic function and thefunctions controlled by the information button

have a range of up to a maximum of 100 m fromthe car.

NOTE

The information button functions can bedisrupted by surrounding radio waves,buildings, topographical conditions etc.

Out of PCC rangeIf the PCC is too far away from the car for theinformation to be read then the status the carwas last left in is shown, without the light trav-elling around on the PCC.

If several PCCs are used for the car then it isonly the PCC last used for locking/unlockingthat shows correct status.

NOTE

If no indicator lamps illuminate when theinformation button is used then this can bebecause the last communication betweenthe PCC and the car was disrupted by sur-rounding radio waves, buildings, topo-graphical conditions etc.

Heart Beat SensorThe function operates using an HBS (HeartBeat Sensor). HBS is a supplement to the car's

alarm system and can indicate at a distancewhether anybody is in the car. This indicationis only displayed if the alarm was triggered.

The HBS detects an individual's heartbeat thatis transmitted to the car's bodywork. For thisreason the function of the HBS can be distur-bed in an environment subject to noise andvibration.

Detachable key bladeUsing the remote control key's detachable keyblade:

• the driver's door can be opened manuallyif central locking cannot be activated withthe remote control key

• access to the glovebox and cargo area(privacy locking) 2 is blocked, seepage 45.

2 Applies to certain markets


02 Locks and alarm


02

44

Removing the key blade

G02

1082

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

At the same time pull the key blade straightout backwards.

Inserting the key bladeCarefully refit the key blade in place in theremote control key, to avoid damaging it.

1. Hold the remote control key with the slotpointed up and lower the key blade into itsslot.

2. Lightly press the key blade. You shouldhear a "click" when the key blade is lockedin.

Unlocking doors with the key bladeIf central locking cannot be activated with theremote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-charged, then the driver's door can be openedas follows:

NOTE

When the driver's door is unlocked using thekey blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-gered.

1. Unlock the driver's door using the keyblade in the door handle's keyhole.

2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting theremote control key in the ignition switch.


02 Locks and alarm

Privacy locking*

02


Privacy locking

G01

7869

Active locks for remote control key, with key bladeand privacy locking not activated.

G01

7870

Active locks for remote control key, without keyblade and privacy locking activated.

The privacy locking function is intended forwhen the car is left for service, with a hotel

parking valet or similar. The glovebox is thenlocked and the tailgate lock is disconnectedfrom the central locking. The tailgate cannot beopened with either the central locking button inthe front doors or the remote control key.

This means that the remote control key withoutkey blade can only be used to activate/deacti-vate the alarm, to open the doors and to drivethe car.

The remote control key is handed over withoutthe detachable key blade which the owner thenkeeps.

NOTE

Do not forget to pull out the cargo coverover the cargo area before closing the tail-gate, see page 211.


G02

0508

Activating privacy locking.

To activate privacy locking:

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.

Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise.

Pull out the key blade. The information dis-play shows a message at the same time.

NOTE

Do not reinsert the key blade into the remotecontrol key but keep it in a safe placeinstead.

• Deactivation takes place in reverse order.

For information on locking the glovebox only,see page 51.


02 Locks and alarm

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*

02


Replacing the battery

G02

1085

G02

1086

G01

5518

OpeningSlide the spring-loaded catch to the

side.

At the same time pull the key bladestraight out backwards.

Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in thehole behind the spring-loaded catch andgently prize the remote control key up.

NOTE

Turn the remote control key over with thebuttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat-teries falling out when it is opened.

IMPORTANT

Avoid touching the battery and its terminalswith your fingers, as this could damage theirfunctionality.

Battery replacementClosely study how the battery/batteries aresecured on the inside of the cover, withregard to their (+) and (–) sides.

Remote control key1. Carefully prize out the battery.2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.

PCC*1. Carefully prize out the batteries.2. First install one new one with the (+) side

up.3. Position the white plastic tab in between

and finally install a second new battery withthe (+) side down.

Battery typeUse batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V- one in the remote control key and two in thePCC.

Assembly1. Press the remote control key together.


02 Locks and alarm

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*

02


2. Hold the remote control key with the slotpointed up and lower the key blade into itsslot.

3. Lightly press the key blade. You shouldhear a "click" when the key blade is lockedin.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that you dispose of old batteriesin an environmentally-friendly way.


02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

02


Keyless drive (only PCC)

Keyless lock and ignition system

G01

7871

The keyless drive function in the PCC allowsthe car to be unlocked, driven and locked with-out the need for a key. You simply have to havethe PCC with you. The system makes it easierand more convenient to open the car, e.g.when your hands are full.

The car's two PCCs incorporate the Keylessfunction. Additional PCCs can be ordered.

PCC rangeIn order to open a door or the tailgate, a PCCmust be no more than approx. 1.5 metres fromthe car door handle or tailgate. This means thatthe person who wishes to lock or unlock a doormust have the PCC with him or her. It is not

possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC ison the opposite side of the car.

The red rings in the preceding illustration indi-cate the range covered by the system's anten-nas.

If all PCCs are removed from the car when theengine is running or key position II is active(see page 71) and if all doors are closed, thena warning message is shown in the informationdisplay and an audio reminder signal sounds atthe same time.

The warning message clears and the audioreminder signal stops when the PCC is broughtback to the car after:

• a door has been opened and closed

• the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch

• the READ button has been pressed.

Handling the PCC safelyIf a PCC with keyless drive function is left in thecar, it is deactivated temporarily when the caris locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.

However, if someone breaks into the car,opens the door and finds the PCC, it can bereactivated. It is therefore important to handleall PCCs with great care.

IMPORTANT

Never leave a PCC behind in the car.

Interference to PCC functionElectromagnetic fields and screening can inter-fere with the keyless drive system. For thisreason, do not place the PCC near mobilephones or metallic objects.

If interference is experienced nonetheless, usethe PCC and key blade in the normal way, seepage 41.

UnlockingOpen the doors with the door handles or openthe tailgate with the tailgate's handle.

Unlocking with the key bladeIf the keyless drive function in the PCC is notoperating, then the driver's door can beunlocked with the key blade. In this case cen-tral locking is not activated.

NOTE

Unlocking with the key blade triggers thealarm. For deactivation, see page 56.

Key memory – driver's seat and doormirrors

PCC memory functionIf several people each with a PCC approach thecar, then the settings for seat and mirrors areimplemented for the person who opens thedriver's door.


02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

02


After the driver's door has been opened byperson A with PCC A, but person B with PCCB shall drive, the settings can be changed inthree ways:

• Standing by the driver's door, or sittingbehind the steering wheel, person Bpresses their PCC's unlock button, seepage 41.

• Select one of three possible memories forseat adjustment with seat button 1-3, seepage 73.

• Adjust seat and mirrors manually, seepage 72 and 90.

LockingLock the doors and the tailgate by pressing thelock button on one of the door handles on theoutside.

All doors and the tailgate must be closedbefore the car can be locked. Otherwise the carwill not be locked.

NOTE

On cars with automatic transmission, thegear selector must be set in the P position– otherwise the car cannot be locked or thealarm armed.

Lock settingsThe keyless function can be adapted to specifywhich of the car doors are to be unlocked,under Car settings Lock settingsKeyless entry. For a description of the menusystem, see page 118.

Antenna location

G02

1179

The keyless system has a number of integratedantennae located around the car:

Tailgate, by wiper motor

Door handle, left rear

Roof, above centre rear seat

Cargo area, central and furthest in underthe floor

Door handle, right rear

Centre console, under the rear section

Centre console, under the front section.

WARNING

People with pacemaker operations shouldnot come closer than 22 cm to the keylesssystem's antennae with their pacemaker.This is to prevent interference between thepacemaker and the keyless system.


02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02


From the outsideThe remote control key locks/unlocks all doorsand the tailgate simultaneously. The lock but-tons and door handles are disengaged duringlocking which also prevents opening from theinside, so-called deadlocks function*, seepage 53.

The fuel filler flap can be opened when the caris unlocked, see page 202. It cannot beopened if the car is locked and the alarm isarmed.

NOTE

The car can be locked even if a door isopen1. It is also locked when the door isclosed, and there is a risk that the remotecontrol key will be locked in.

WARNING

Be aware that there is a risk that you can belocked in the car if it is locked from the out-side.

Automatic relockingIf none of the doors or the tailgate is openedwithin two minutes of unlocking, all are lockedagain automatically. This function prevents the

car from being left unlocked unintentionally.For cars with alarms, see page 56.

From the inside

G01

9216

All of the doors and the tailgate can be lockedor unlocked simultaneously using the door but-tons on the door panel.

UnlockingA door can be unlocked from the inside in twodifferent ways:

• Press the door unlock button.

Press and hold to also open all windows.

• Pull the door handle once and release. Pullthe door handle again to open the door.

LockingPress the door lock button after the front doorsare closed. Press and hold to also close all ofthe windows and the sunroof.

All the doors can be locked manually with theirrespective lock buttons after they have beenclosed.

Automatic lockingThe doors and tailgate can be locked automat-ically when the car starts to move.

The function can be activated/deactivatedunder Car settings Lock settingsDoors automatic lock. For a description of themenu system, see page 118.

1 Only applies to cars in certain markets, but not to cars with Keyless drive.


02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02


Glovebox

G02

0548

The glovebox can only be locked/unlockedusing the remote control key's detachable keyblade. (For information on the key blade, seepage 44).

Locking the glovebox:

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.The keyhole is horizontal in the lockedposition.

Pull out the key blade.

Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.

For information on privacy locking, seepage 45.

Tailgate

G02

1093

Unlocking with the remote control keyThe alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed*,and the tailgate unlocked and opened on itsown* by using the remote control key.

NOTE

On cars with the power operated tailgateoption, the tailgate is opened – otherwise itis only unlocked, see page 52.

If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarmindicator on the instrument panel stops toshow that alarm for the whole of the car is notarmed. The alarm's level and movement sen-sors and the sensors for opening the tailgateare automatically disconnected.

The doors remain locked and armed.

NOTE

When the tailgate is closed it remainsunlocked until the car is relocked with theremote control key.

Locking with the remote control keyPress the remote control key button for lock-ing, see page 41.

If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarmindicator on the instrument panel starts to flashto show that alarm is armed.

Unlocking the car from inside

G02

1099

Press the lighting panel button to unlockand open* the tailgate.


02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02


Power operated tailgate*

G01

7876

IMPORTANT

Pay attention to the height of the roof whenusing power operation. Do not use powertailgate operation with low roof heights, seeunder the heading "Interrupt opening/clos-ing the tailgate".

NOTE

• If the system has been operating con-tinuously for more than 60 seconds thenit is switched off to avoid overloading. Itcan be used again after about 10minutes.

• If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected then the cover must beopened and closed manually once inorder to reset the system.

Snow and windIf the tailgate is forced down by something justwhen it is being opened, e.g. snow, ice orstrong wind, and this causes the tailgate tolower, then it is closed automatically.

Pinch protectionIf something with sufficient resistance preventsthe tailgate from opening/closing then thepinch protection is activated.

• During opening the power tailgate opera-tion is switched off and the tailgate is dis-engaged.

• During closing the tailgate returns in theopposite direction.

WARNING

Pay attention to the risk of crushing whenopening/closing. Before starting to open/close; make sure that there is nobody closeto the tailgate as a crushing injury couldhave serious consequences.

Always operate the tailgate with caution.

Manual tailgate operationThe system is disengaged if the outside handleis activated a second time. The tailgate canthen be operated manually.

Opening the tailgateOpening can be carried out in three ways:

• The button on the lighting panel -hold the button depressed until the tailgatestarts to open.

• The tailgate's outside handle.

• Long press on the remote control key'sbutton for unlocking the tailgate.

Closing the tailgateClose using the close button on the tailgate ormanually.

• Press the tailgate's button – thetailgate closes automatically.


02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02


Stop the opening/closing of the tailgateThis can be carried out in four ways:

• The button on the lighting panel

• The button on the remote control key

• The tailgate's button

• The tailgate's outside handle - Pull the han-dle a second time.

The following takes place:

• During opening the power tailgate opera-tion is switched off and the tailgate is dis-engaged.

• During closing the tailgate returns to fullyopen position.

Deadlocks*When deadlocked, the doors cannot beopened from the inside if they are locked.

The deadlocks are activated with the remotecontrol key and are set after a 10 second delayafter the doors are locked.

The car can only be unlocked from a deadlockstate with the remote control key. The driver'sdoor can also be unlocked with the detachablekey blade.

Temporary deactivation

G02

1360

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

Navigation

ENTER

MENU

EXIT

If someone is going to stay in the car but thedoors must be locked from the outside, thenthe deadlocks function can be temporarilyswitched off. This is carried out as follows:

1. Access the menu system under Carsettings (for a detailed description of themenu system, see page 118).

2. Select Reduced guard.

3. Select Activate once: The instrumentpanel display shows the messageReduced guard - See manual and thedeadlocks function is switched off whenthe car is locked.

or

Select Ask on exit: Each time the engineis switched off the audio system's displayshows the message ENTER reducesprotection until the engine is startedagain. Press EXIT to cancel - then selectone of the alternatives:

• If the deadlocks function shall be switchedoff: Press ENTER and lock the car.

If the car is equipped with an alarm with move-ment and tilt detectors*, then these areswitched off at the same time, see page 56.

The next time the engine is started, the systemis reset to zero and the instrument panel dis-play shows the message Full guard at whichthe deadlocks function and the alarm's move-ment and tilt detectors* are re-engaged.

or

• If the locking system shall not be changed:Select no options at all and lock the car. Orpress EXIT and lock the car.


02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02

54

NOTE

If the car is equipped with an alarm:

Remember that the car's alarm is armedwhen the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from theinside then the alarm will be triggered.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to remain in the carwithout first deactivating the deadlocks toavoid the risk of anyone being locked in.


02 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

02


Manual blocking of the rear doors

G02

1077

The child safety locks are located on the trailingedge of the rear doors and are only accessiblewhen the doors are open.

Use the key blade to turn the lock and thusactivate or deactivate the child safety lock.

The door cannot be opened from inside.

The doors can be opened from inside.

NOTE

Cars with electric child safety locks do nothave manual child locks.

Electrical locking of the rear doors andpower windows*

G01

9300

When the electric child safety lock is active:

• the rear windows can only be opened withthe driver's door control panel

• the rear doors cannot be opened from theinside.

1. Child safety locks are activated/deacti-vated in key position I or II see page 71.

2. Press the button in the driver's door controlpanel.> The information display shows a mes-

sage.

The lamp on the switch illuminates whenthe locks are activated.


02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

02


GeneralThe alarm is triggered if:

• a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened

• a non-approved key is used or if an attemptis made to force the ignition switch

• a movement is detected in the passengercompartment (if fitted with a movementdetector)

• the car is raised or towed away (if fittedwith a tilt detector*)

•• anyone tries to disconnect the siren.

If there is a fault in the alarm system, the infor-mation display shows a message. Contact anauthorised Volvo workshop.

NOTE

The movement detectors trigger the alarmin the event of movements in the passengercompartment. For this reason the alarmcould be triggered if the car is left with awindow open or if an electric passengercompartment heater is used. To avoid this:Close the windows when leaving the car andaim the air from the passenger compart-ment heater so that it is not directed up intothe passenger compartment.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or modify alarmsystem components. All such attemptscould affect the terms of insurance.

Alarm indicator

G02

1103

A red LED on the instrument panel indicates

• LED not lit – Alarm not armed

• The LED flashes once every other second– Alarm is armed

• The LED flashes rapidly after disarming thealarm (and until the remote control key isinserted in the ignition switch and key posi-tion I is selected) – Alarm has been trig-gered.

Arming the alarm• Press the remote control key lock button.

Disarming the alarm• Press the remote control key unlock but-

ton.

Deactivating a triggered alarmPress the remote control key unlock button orinsert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch.

Other alarm functions

Automatic re-arming of the alarmThis function prevents the car being left withalarm disarmed unintentionally.

If the car is unlocked with the remote controlkey (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of thedoors or the tailgate is opened within 2minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is relocked at the same time.

Alarm signalsWhen the alarm is triggered, the following hap-pens:

• A siren sounds for less than 30 seconds.The siren has its own battery which is inde-pendent of the car battery.

• The direction indicators flash for 5 minutesor until the alarm has been deactivated.


a battery cable is disconnected

the alarm system's status:

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

02


Remote control key not workingIf the remote control key is not working, thealarm can still be switched off and the carstarted as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.The alarm is triggered and the sirensounds.

2. Insert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch. The alarm is deactivated. The alarmindicator flashes quickly until the remotecontrol key is inserted.

Reduced alarm level

G02

1360

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

Navigation

ENTER

MENU

EXIT

To avoid inadvertently triggering of the alarm -for example when leaving a dog in the car orduring a ferry crossing - the movement and tiltdetectors can be temporarily switched off. Thisis carried out as follows:

1. Access the menu system under Carsettings (for a detailed description of themenu system, see page 118).

2. Select Reduced guard.

3. Select Activate once: The instrumentpanel display shows the messageReduced guard See manual and themovement and tilt detectors are switchedoff when the car is locked.

or

Select Ask on exit: Each time the engineis switched off the audio system's displayshows the message ENTER reducesprotection until the engine is startedonce again. EXIT cancels - then selectone of the alternatives:

• If the movement and tilt detectors shall beswitched off: Press ENTER and lock thecar.

If the car is equipped with the deadlocks func-tion* then it is switched off at the same time,see page 53.

The next time the engine is started, the systemis reset to zero and the instrument panel dis-play shows the message Full guard at whichthe movement and tilt detectors and the dead-locks function are re-engaged.

or

• If the detectors shall not be switched off:Select no options at all and lock the car. Orpress EXIT and lock the car.

Testing the alarm system

Testing the movement detector in thepassenger compartment1. Close all windows. Remain in the car.

2. Arming the alarm, see page 56.

3. Wait 15 seconds.

4. Trigger the alarm by moving your arms for-ward and back at backrest height. A sirensounds and all direction indicators flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the carwith the remote control key.

Testing the alarm sensors in the doors1. Arming the alarm, see page 56.


02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

02


2. Wait 15 seconds.

3. Unlock the driver's door using the keyblade.

4. Open the driver's door. A siren sounds andall direction indicators flash.


Testing the alarm sensors in the bonnet1. Sit in the car and deactivate the alarm, see

page 56.

2. Arm the alarm, see page 56. Remain in thecar and lock the doors with the button onthe remote control key.

3. Wait 15 seconds.

4. Open the bonnet with the handle under thedashboard. A siren sounds and all direc-tion indicators flash.



02 Locks and alarm

02

59


G02

0912


Instruments and controls........................................................................ 62Key positions........................................................................................... 71Seats....................................................................................................... 72Steering wheel........................................................................................ 76Lighting................................................................................................... 77Wipers and washing................................................................................ 86Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 89Power sunroof*........................................................................................ 93Starting the engine.................................................................................. 95Starting the engine – Flexifuel................................................................. 97Starting the engine – external battery..................................................... 99Gearboxes............................................................................................. 100All-wheel drive – AWD*......................................................................... 104Foot brake............................................................................................. 105Hill Descent Control (HDC).................................................................... 107Parking brake........................................................................................ 109

HomeLink EU*..................................................................................... 112


03YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT


03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

03

62

Instrument overview

G02

1107

Left-hand drive.




03


Function Page

Menus and messages,direction indicators,main/dipped beam, tripcomputer

77,80, 120,152

Cruise control 157, 158

Horn, airbags 18, 76

Combined instrumentpanel

65, 69

Menu, audio and phonecontrol

118,135, 188

Ignition switch 71

Start/stop button 95

Hazard warning flashers 79

Door handle -

Control panel 50, 55,89, 90

Menu control, climatecontrol and audio system

118,125, 137

Climate control, ECC* 125

Gear selector 100

Function Page

Controls for active chas-sis (Four-C)*

156

Wipers and washing 86, 87

Steering wheel adjust-ment

76

Parking brake* 109

Bonnet opener 224

Seat adjustment* 72

Headlamp control,opener for fuel filler flapand tailgate

51, 77,202




03

64

876

13141516

54321

11

10

11

12

10

9

17

18

20

19

G02

1108

Right-hand drive.




03


Function Page

Hazard warning flashers 79

Ignition switch 71

Start/stop button 95

Cruise control 157, 158

Combined instrumentpanel

65, 69

Horn, airbags 18, 76

Menu, audio and phonecontrol

118,135, 188

Wipers and washing 86, 87

Headlamp control,opener for fuel filler flapand tailgate

51, 77,202

Door handle -

Control panel 50, 55,89, 90

Seat adjustment* 72

Bonnet opener 224

Parking brake 109

Function Page

Steering wheel adjust-ment

76

Menus and messages,direction indicators,main/dipped beam, tripcomputer

77,80, 120,152

Controls for active chas-sis (Four-C)*

156

Gear selector 100

Climate control, ECC* 125

Menu control, climatecontrol and audio system

118,125, 137

Information displays

G02

1112

Information displays.

The information displays show information onsome of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control,trip computer and messages. The informationis shown with text and symbols.

There are further descriptions under the func-tions that use the information displays.




03

66

Meters

G02

1113

Meters in the combined instrument panel.

Speedometer

Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page152, and Refuelling, page 202.

Tachometer. The meter indicates enginespeed in thousands of revolutions perminute (rpm).

Indicator, information and warningsymbols

G01

8282

Indicator and warning symbols.

Indicator and information symbols

Indicator and warning symbols 1

Main beam and direction indicator symbol

Functionality checkAll indicator and warning symbols illuminate inkey position II or when the engine is started.When the engine has started, all the symbolsshould go out except the parking brake sym-bol, which only goes out when the brake isdisengaged.

If the engine does not start or if the functionalitycheck is carried out in key position II then all

symbols go out after 5 seconds except thesymbol for faults in the car's emissions systemand the symbol for low oil pressure.

Indicator and information symbols

Symbol Specification

Direction indicators on trailer

Emissions system

ABS fault

Rear fog lamp on

Stability system

Engine preheater (diesel)

Low level in fuel tank

Information, read display text

Main beam On

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 225.




03

67


Left-hand direction indicators

Right-hand direction indicators

Direction indicators on trailerThis symbol flashes when the direction indica-tors are used and the trailer is connected. If thesymbol flashes more quickly then one of thelamps on the car or the trailer is broken.

Emissions systemIf the symbol illuminates then it may be due toa fault in the car's emissions system. Drive toan authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-tem checked.

ABS faultIf this symbol illuminates then the system is notworking. The car's regular brake system con-tinues to work, but without the ABS function.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off theengine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive toan authorised Volvo workshop to have theABS system checked.

Rear fog lampThis symbol illuminates when the rear fog lampis on.

Stability systemA flashing symbol indicates that the stabilitysystem is operating. If the symbol illuminateswith constant glow then there is a fault in thesystem.

Engine preheater (diesel)This symbol illuminates during engine preheat-ing. Preheating occurs when the temperatureis below 2 °C. The car can be started once thesymbol goes out.

Low level in fuel tankWhen the symbol illuminates the level in thefuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.

Information, read display textWhen one of the car's systems does notbehave as intended, this information symbolilluminates and a text appears on the informa-tion display. The message text is cleared withthe READ button, see page 120, or it disap-pears automatically after a time (time depend-ing on which function is indicated). The infor-mation symbol can also illuminate inconjunction with other symbols.

NOTE

When a service message is shown, the sym-bol and message are cleared using theREAD button, or clear automatically after awhile.

Main beam OnThe symbol illuminates when main beam is onand with main beam flash

Left/right-hand direction indicatorsBoth direction indicator symbols flash whenthe hazard warning flashers are used.

Indicator and warning symbols


Low oil pressure A

Parking brake applied

Airbags – SRS

Seatbelt reminder

Alternator not charging




03

68


Fault in brake system

Warning

A For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressureis not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages224 and 226.

Low oil pressureIf this symbol illuminates during driving thenthe engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop theengine immediately and check the engine oillevel, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi-nates and the oil level is normal, contact anauthorised Volvo workshop.

Parking brake appliedThis symbol illuminates with a constant glowwhen the parking brake is applied. With theelectric parking brake, this symbol flasheswhile it is being applied and then illuminateswith a constant glow.

A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen.Read the message on the information display.

NOTE

This symbol also illuminates when themechanical parking brake is only lightlyapplied.

Airbags – SRSIf this symbol remains illuminated or illuminateswhile driving, it means a fault has beendetected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, orIC systems. Drive immediately to an authorisedVolvo workshop to have the system checked.

Seatbelt reminderThis symbol illuminates if someone in a frontseat has not put on their seatbelt or if someonein a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.

Alternator not chargingThis symbol illuminates during driving if a faulthas occurred in the electrical system. Contactan authorised Volvo workshop.

Fault in brake systemIf this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid levelmay be too low. Stop the car in a safe placeand check the level in the brake fluid reservoir,see page 227.

If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at thesame time, there may be a fault in the brakeforce distribution system.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off theengine.

2. Restart the engine.

• If both symbols extinguish, continuedriving.

• If the symbols remain illuminated, checkthe level in the brake fluid reservoir, see

page 227. If the brake fluid level is nor-mal but the symbols are still illuminated,the car can be driven, with great care, toan authorised Volvo workshop to havethe brake system checked.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in thebrake fluid reservoir, do not drive furtherbefore topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid mustbe investigated by an authorised Volvoworkshop.

WARNING

If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi-nated at the same time, there is a risk thatthe rear end will skid during heavy braking.

WarningThe red warning symbol illuminates when afault has been indicated which could affect thesafety and/or driveability of the car. An explan-atory text is shown on the information displayat the same time. The symbol remains visibleuntil the fault has been rectified but the textmessage can be cleared with the READ but-ton, see page 121. The warning symbol canalso illuminate in conjunction with other sym-bols.




03

69

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the carfurther.

2. Read the information on the informationdisplay. Implement the action in accord-ance with the message in the display. Clearthe message using the READ button.

Reminder – doors not closedIf one of the doors, the bonnet 2 or tailgate isnot closed properly then the information orwarning symbol illuminates together with anexplanatory text message in the combinedinstrument panel. Stop the car in a safe placeas soon as possible and close the door, bonnetor boot lid, whichever is open.

If the car is driven at a speed lower thanapprox. 7 km/h then the information

symbol illuminates.

If the car is driven at a speed higherthan about 7 km/h then the warning

symbol illuminates.

Trip meter

G02

1123

Trip meter and controls.

Display for trip meter

Controls for switching between trip metersT1 and T2, as well as resetting the tripmeters.

The meters are used to measure short dis-tances.

One short press on the control switchesbetween the two trip meters T1 and T2. A longpress (more than 2 seconds) resets an activetrip meter to zero. The distance is shown in thedisplay.

Clock

G02

1125

Clock and setting knob.

Controls for setting the clock.

Information display for showing the time.

Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to setthe time. The set time is shown in the informa-tion display.

The clock can be temporarily replaced by asymbol in conjunction with a message, seepage 121.

2 Only cars with alarm*.




03

70

Controls for trip meter and clock

G01

6141

Location of controls.



Key positions

03


Functions

G02

1126

Ignition switch with remote control key, start/stopbutton.

Insert and remove the remote control keyThe remote control key is inserted into the igni-tion switch. With one gentle push the remotecontrol key is captured into the correct posi-tion.

The remote control key is withdrawn from theignition switch by means of one touch. The keyis then ejected and can be removed. Automatictransmission* must be in position P.

For information on the audio system's func-tions with remote control key removed, seepage 135.

IMPORTANT

Foreign objects in the ignition switch canimpair the function or destroy the lock.

Do not insert the remote control key back-wards! Grip the end with the detachable keyblade. see page 44.

Key position 0Insert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch.

Key position IPress the remote control key into the ignitionswitch and press START/STOP ENGINE.

NOTE

To reach key position II without starting theengine - do not depress the brake/clutchpedal.

Key position IIPress the remote control key into the ignitionswitch and press START/STOP ENGINE forapprox. 2 seconds.

Starting the engineStart the engine, see page 95.

Stopping the enginePress START/STOP ENGINE.

If the car is moving or has automatic transmis-sion and the gear selector is not in position P:Press twice or hold the button depressed untilthe engine stops.

Return to key position 0Press START/STOP ENGINE to return from Ior II to key position 0 0.

NOTE

During towing the remote control key shouldremain in the ignition switch so that thelighting can be switched on.

Posi-tion

Function

0 Odometer, clock and tempera-ture gauge are illuminated. Thesteering lock is deactivated. Theaudio system can be used.

I Sunroof, power windows, phone,ventilation fan, ECC and wind-screen wipers can be used.

II The headlamps come on. Warn-ing/indicator lamps illuminate for5 seconds. All equipment oper-ates apart from heated seats andrear window defroster which onlywork when the engine is running.



Seats

03


Front seats

G02

1127

Lumbar support adjustment, turn thewheel 1.

Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjustthe distance to the steering wheel and ped-als. Check that the seat is locked afterchanging position.

Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,pump up/down.

Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.

Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.

Control panel for power seat*.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver's seatbefore setting off, never while driving.Check that the seat is locked in position.

Lowering the front seat backrest*

G02

1129

The passenger seat backrest can be foldedforward to make room for long loads.

Move the seat as far back/down as possi-ble.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position

Lift the catches on the rear of the backrestand fold it forward.

Push the seat forward so that the head restraint"locks" in under the glovebox.

Power seat*

G02

1133

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat forward/backward and up/down

Backrest rake

The power front seats have overload protectionwhich is tripped if a seat is blocked by anobject. If this happens, go to key position I or0 and wait a short time before adjusting theseat again.

Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)can be made at a time.

PreparationsThe seats can be adjusted for a certain timeafter unlocking the door with the remote con-trol key without the key in the ignition switch.

1 Also applies to power seat.



Seats

03


Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi-tion I and can always be made when the engineis running.

Seat with memory function*

G02

1134

Store settingMemory button

Memory button

Memory button

Button for storing settings

1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.

2. Hold the button depressed to store set-tings while depressing one of the memorybuttons.

Using a stored settingHold one of the memory buttons depresseduntil the seat and the door mirrors stop. If yourelease the button then the movement of theseat will stop.

Key memory* in remote control keyThe positions of the driver's seat and the doormirrors are stored in the key memory when thecar is locked with the remote control key.

G01

4387

When the car is unlocked with the same remotecontrol key and the driver's door is opened thedriver's seat and also the door mirrors auto-matically adopt the positions stored in the keymemory.

NOTE

The seat and the door mirrors do not moveif they are already set the relevant position.

It is also possible to use the key memory bypressing the unlock button on the remote con-trol key when the driver's door is open.

The key memory can be activated/deactivatedunder Car Key memory Seat & mirrorpositions. For a description of the menu sys-tem, see page 118.

NOTE

The key memory in the two remote controlkeys and the seat memory are completelyindependent of each other.

Emergency stopIf the seat accidentally begins to move, pressone of the buttons to stop the seat.

Restarting to reach the seat position stored inthe key memory is performed by pressing theunlock button on the remote control key. Thedriver's door must then be open.



Seats

03


WARNING

Risk of crushing! Make sure that children donot play with the controls. Check that thereare no objects in front of, behind or underthe seat during adjustment. Ensure thatnone of the backseat passengers will betrapped.

Heated/ventilated seats*For heated/ventilated seats, see page 126.

Rear seats

Head restraint, centre seat, rear

G01

7624

The head restraint can be adjusted vertically tosuit the height of the passenger. The upperedge of the head restraint should be aligned

with middle of the back of the head. Slide it upas required.

To lower the head restraint again, the button(located in the centre between the backrestand head restraint, see illustration) must bepressed in while the head restraint is presseddown.

Manual lowering of the outer headrestraints, rear seat

G01

8760

Pull the locking handle closest to the headrestraint to fold the head restraint forward.

The head restraint is moved back manuallyuntil a "click" can be heard.

Lowering the rear seat backrestThe triple-section rear seat backrest can befolded in different ways in order to facilitateloading long objects.

NOTE

The front seats may need to be pushed for-wards, and/or the backrests adjustedupwards, in order that the rear backrestscan be folded forward fully.

• The left-hand backrest can be folded sep-arately.

• The centre backrest can be folded sepa-rately.

• The right-hand backrest can be foldedtogether with the centre backrest.

• All backrests can be folded together.

G01

7747



Seats

03

75

G01

7903

If the centre backrest is being lowered –release and adjust down the centre back-rest's head restraint, see page 74. Theouter head restraints are lowered automat-ically when the outer backrests are low-ered.

Pull up the backrest's locking handlewhile folding the backrest forward at thesame time. A red indicator on the lockcatch shows that the backrest is nolonger locked in place.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

NOTE

When the backrest has been raised, the redindicator should no longer be showing. If itis still showing then the backrest is notlocked in place.

WARNING

Check that the backrests and headrestraints in the rear seats are firmly lockedafter raising.



Steering wheel

03


Adjusting

G02

1138

Adjusting the steering wheel.

Lever - releasing the steering wheel

Possible steering wheel positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for bothheight and depth:

1. Pull the lever towards you to release thesteering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the positionthat suits you.

3. Push back the lever to fix the steeringwheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press thesteering wheel lightly at the same time asyou push the lever back.

WARNING

Adjust and secure the steering wheel beforedriving.

With speed related power steering* the level ofsteering force can be adjusted, seepage 156.

Keypads*

G02

1139

Keypads in the steering wheel.

Cruise control, see page 157

Adaptive cruise control, see page 158

Audio and phone control, see page 135

Horn

G02

1140

Horn.

Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.



Lighting

03


Light switches

G02

1141

Overview, light switches.

Thumbwheel for adjusting display andinstrument lighting

Rear fog lamp

Front fog lamps*

Light switches

Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling

Instrument lightingDifferent display and instrument lighting isswitched on depending on key position, seepage 71.

The display lighting is automatically subduedin darkness - the sensitivity is set with thethumbwheel.

The intensity of the instrument lighting isadjusted with the thumbwheel.

Headlamp levellingThe load in the car changes the vertical align-ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjustingthe height of the beam. Lower the beam if thecar is heavily laden.

1. Allow the engine to run or have the remotecontrol key in position I.

2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower beam alignment.

Cars with Bi-Xenon and Active Bi-Xenonheadlamps* have automatic headlamp level-ling and are therefore not equipped with athumbwheel.

Main/dipped beam

G02

1142

Headlamp control and stalk switch.

Position for main beam flash

Position for main beam

Posi-tion

Specification

Automatic*/deactivated dippedbeam. Only main beam flash.

Position/parking lamps

Automatic dipped beam. Mainbeam and main beam flashwork in this position.



Lighting

03


NOTE

Main beam can only be activated in position.

Main beam flashMove the stalk switch gently towards the steer-ing wheel to the position for main beam flash.Main beam comes on until the stalk switch isreleased.

Dipped beamWhen the engine is started, dipped beam isactivated automatically* if the headlamp con-trol is in position . If necessary, auto-matic dipped beam for this position can bedeactivated by an authorised Volvo workshop.

In position dipped beam is always acti-vated automatically when the engine is runningor when the remote control key is in positionII.

Main beamMain beam can only be activated when theheadlamp control is in position . Acti-vate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalkswitch towards the steering wheel to the endposition and release.

When main beam has been activated the sym-bol illuminates in the combined instru-ment panel.

Active Bi-Xenon Lights*

G02

1143

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)and activated (right) respectively.

If the car is equipped with active headlamps(Active Bi-Xenon Lights, ABL) the light fromthe headlamps follows the steering wheelmovement in order to provide maximum light-ing in bends and junctions and so provideincreased safety.

The function is activated automatically whenthe car is started. The button in the cen-tre console illuminates when the function isactivated, it flashes in the event of a malfunc-

tion. The function is only active in twilight ordarkness and only when the car is moving.

The function can be deactivated/activated withthe button.


G02

1144

Headlamp control in position for position/parkinglamps.

Turn the headlamp control to the centre posi-tion (number plate lighting comes on at thesame time).

Rear position lamps also come on when thetailgate is opened in order to alert anybodybehind.



Lighting

03


Brake lightsThe brake light automatically comes on duringbraking.

Emergency brake light and automatichazard warning flashers, EBLEmergency Brake Lights (EBL) are activated inthe event of heavy braking or if the ABS brakesare activated. This function means that thebrake light flashes to immediately alert carstravelling behind.

The system is activated if ABS is used for morethan 0.5 seconds or in the event of heavy brak-ing, however, only when braking from speedsabove 50 km/h. When the speed of the car islower than 30 km/h the brake lights shine nor-mally again and the hazard warning flashersare switched on automatically. The hazardwarning flashers remain on until the car accel-erates again but can be deactivated with thebutton for hazard warning flashers

Front fog lamps*

G02

1145

Button for front fog lamps.

The front fog lamps can be switched on alongwith main/dipped beam or position/parkinglamps.

Press the button for on/off. The light in the but-ton illuminates when the fog lamps are on.

NOTE

Regulations for using front fog lamps varybetween different countries.

Rear fog lamp

G02

1146

Button for rear fog lamp.

The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp andcan only be switched on in combination withmain/dipped beam or the front fog lamps.

Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lampindicator symbol on the combinedinstrument panel and the light in the button illu-minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

The rear fog lamps are switched off automati-cally when the engine is switched off.

NOTE

Regulations for using rear fog lamps varybetween different countries.



Lighting

03

80

Hazard warning flashers

G02

1147

Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warningflashers. Both direction indicator symbols inthe combined instrument panel flash when thehazard warning flashers are in use.

The hazard warning flashers are activatedautomatically when the car brakes so suddenlythat the emergency brake lights (EBL) are acti-vated and speed is below 30 km/h. Theyremain on when the car has stopped and aredeactivated automatically when the car isdriven off again or the button is depressed.

Direction indicators/flashers

G02

1148

Direction indicators/flashers.

Short flash sequenceMove the stalk switch up or down to thefirst position and release. The directionindicators flash three times.

Continuous flash sequenceMove the stalk switch up or down to theouter position.

The stalk switch remains in its position and ismoved back manually, or automatically by thesteering wheel movement.

Direction indicator symbolsFor direction indicator symbols, see page 66.

Interior lighting

G02

1149

Controls in roof console for the front readinglamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Reading lamp, right-hand side

Interior lighting

All lighting in the passenger compartment canbe switched on and off manually within30 minutes from when:

• the engine has been switched off and theremote control key is in position 0

• the car has been unlocked but the enginehas not been started.



Lighting

03

81

Front roof lightingThe front reading lamps are switched on or offby pressing the relevant button in the roof con-sole.

Rear roof lighting

G02

1150

Rear roof lighting.

The lamps are switched on or off by pressingeach respective button.

Courtesy lightingCourtesy lighting (and passenger compart-ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-tively when a side door is opened or closed.

Glovebox lightingGlovebox lighting is switched on and offrespectively when the lid is opened or closed.

Vanity mirrorThe lighting for the vanity mirror, seepage 187, is switched on and off respectivelywhen the cover is opened or closed.

Lighting, cargo areaThe lighting in the cargo area is switched onand off respectively when the tailgate isopened or closed.

Automatic lightingThe switch for passenger compartment light-ing has three positions for the lighting in thepassenger compartment:

• Off – right-hand side depressed, automaticlighting deactivated.

• Neutral position – automatic lighting acti-vated.

• On – left-hand side depressed, passengercompartment lighting on.

Neutral positionWhen the button is in neutral position the pas-senger compartment lighting is switched onand off automatically in accordance with thefollowing:

The passenger compartment lighting isswitched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:

• the car is unlocked with the remote controlkey or key blade, see pages 41 or 44

• the engine is switched off and the remotecontrol key is in position 0.

Passenger compartment lighting is switchedoff when:

• the engine is started.

• the car is locked.

The passenger compartment lighting comeson and remains on for two minutes if one of thedoors is open.

If any lighting is switched on manually and thecar is locked then it will be switched off auto-matically after two minutes.

Home safe light durationSome of the exterior lighting can be keptswitched on to work as home safe lighting afterthe car has been locked.

1. Remove the remote control key from theignition switch.

2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward thesteering wheel to the end position andrelease it. The function can be activated inthe same way as with main beam flash, seepage 77.

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.



Lighting

03


When the function is activated, dipped beam,the parking lamps, direction indicator lamps,door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, innerroof lamps and courtesy lighting are switchedon.

The length of time for which the home safelighting should be kept on can be set under Carsettings Light settings Home safe lightduration. For a description of the menu sys-tem, see page 118.

Approach light durationApproach lighting is switched on with theremote control key, see page 41, and is usedto switch on the car's lighting at a distance.

When the function is activated with the remotecontrol the parking lamps, direction indicatorlamps, door mirror lamps, number plate light-ing, inner roof lamps and courtesy lighting areswitched on.

The length of time for which the approach light-ing should be kept on can be set under Carsettings Light settings Approach lightduration. For a description of the menu sys-tem, see page 118.

Adjusting headlamp pattern

G02

1151

Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.

G02

1152

Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.

The headlamp pattern must be adjusted toavoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can beset for right or left-hand traffic. The correct pat-tern will also better illuminate the verge.

Bi-Xenon and Active Bi-Xenonheadlamps*

G01

9442

Headlamp control for adjusting headlamp pattern.

Normal position – the headlamp pattern iscorrect for the country in which the car wasdelivered.

Adapted position – designed for oppositeheadlamp pattern.

WARNING

The headlamps must be handled withextreme care due to the Xenon lamp beingsupplied from a high-voltage unit.

The country in which the car is delivered deter-mines whether normal position is designed forright or left-hand traffic.



Lighting

03

83

Example 1If a car that is delivered in Sweden shall bedriven in the UK then the headlamps must beset to the adjusted position, see precedingillustration.

Example 2A car that is delivered in the UK is designed forleft-hand traffic and is driven there with theheadlamps in normal position, see precedingillustration.

Halogen headlampsThe headlamp pattern for halogen headlampsis readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.The headlamp pattern may not be as good.

Masking the headlamps1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand

drive cars or the C and D templates forright-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:2,see page 85. Use a photocopier with azoom function for example:

• A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, rightlens)

• B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)

• C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, rightlens)

• D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)

2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesivewaterproof material and cut it out. Alsomark out the red dots.

3. Position the self-adhesive templates sothat the red dots correspond with the dotson the headlamp lenses that form refer-ence points, see the following illustrations.



Lighting

03

84

Masking the halogen headlamps

G03

3025

Upper row: masking left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: masking right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.



Lighting

03

85

Templates for halogen headlamps

G02

1155



Wipers and washing

03


Windscreen wipers

G01

8663

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.

Rain sensor, on/off

Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency

Windscreen wipers offMove the stalk switch to position 0 toswitch off the windscreen wipers.

Single sweepRaise the stalk switch and release tomake one sweep.

Intermittent wipingSet the number of sweeps per timeunit with the thumbwheel when inter-

mittent wiping is selected.

Continuous wipingThe wipers sweep at normal speed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers during winter -ensure that the wiper blades are not frozenin and that any snow or ice on the wind-screen (and rear window) is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipersare cleaning the windscreen. The wind-screen must be wet when the windscreenwipers are operating.

Rain sensor*The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-screen wipers based on how much water itdetects on the windscreen. The sensitivity ofthe rain sensor can be adjusted using thethumbwheel.

When the rain sensor is activated a light in thebutton the rain sensor symbol is shownin the right-hand display in the combinedinstrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivityWhen activating the rain sensor, the car mustbe running or the remote control key in positionI or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switchmust be in position 0 or in the position for asingle sweep.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button. The windscreen wipers make one

sweep.

Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to makean extra sweep.

Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi-tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (Anextra sweep is made when the thumbwheel isturned upward.)

DeactivatingDeactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but-ton or move the stalk switch down toanother wiper program.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivatedwhen the key is removed from the ignitionswitch or five minutes after the ignition hasbeen switched off.



Wipers and washing

03


IMPORTANT

The windscreen wipers could start and bedamaged in an automatic car wash. Deac-tivate the rain sensor while the car is runningor the remote control key is in position I orII. The symbol in the combined instrumentpanel and the lamp in the button go out.

Washing the headlamps and windows

G01

9401

Washing function.

Washing the windscreenMove the stalk switch toward the steeringwheel to start the windscreen and headlampwashers.

The windscreen wipers will make several moresweeps once the stalk switch has beenreleased. The headlamps are washed alter-nately to prevent light intensity being reduced.

NOTE

One headlamp is washed at a time.

Heated washer nozzles*The washer nozzles are heated automaticallyin cold weather to prevent the washer fluidfreezing solid.

High-pressure headlamp washing*High-pressure headlamp washing consumes alarge quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, theheadlamps are washed automatically at everyfifth windscreen wash cycle.

Wiper and washer, rear window

G01

7632

Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping

Rear window wiper – continuous speed

Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrowin the illustration above) to initiate rear windowwashing and wiping.

Wiper – reversingEngaging reverse gear while the windscreenwipers are on initiates intermittent rear windowwiping 1. The function stops when reverse gearis disengaged.

If the rear window wiper is already on at con-tinuous speed, no change is made.

1 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.



Wipers and washing

03

88

NOTE

On cars with rain sensor, the rear windowwiper is activated with reversing, if the sen-sor is activated and it is raining.



Windows, rearview and door mirrors

03


General

Laminated glassThe glass is reinforced which pro-vides better protection againstbreak-ins and improved sound insu-lation in the passenger compartment.

The windscreen and other windows* have lami-nated glass.

G02

1849

Water and dirt-repellent coating*Windows are treated with a coatingthat improves the view in difficult

weather conditions. Maintenance, seepage 264.

IMPORTANT

Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove icefrom the windows. Use the defroster toremove ice from the mirrors. An ice scrapercould scratch the mirror glass!

Power windows

G01

8516

Driver's door control panel.

Switch for electric child safety locks* anddisengaging rear power window buttons,see page 55.

Rear window controls

Front window controls

WARNING

Check that none of the rear seat passengersis in danger of becoming trapped in any waycaught when closing the windows from thedriver's door.

WARNING

Make sure that children or other passengersare not in danger of becoming trapped inany way when closing the windows, in par-ticular when the remote control key is used.

WARNING

If there are children in the car, remember toalways switch off the supply to the powerwindows by removing the remote controlkey if the driver leaves the car.

Operating

G01

8517

Operating the power windows.

Operating without auto

Operating with auto




03

90

All power windows can be operated using thecontrol panel in the driver's door. Each controlpanel in the other doors can only control itsown respective power window. The power win-dows can only be controlled with one controlpanel at a time.

In order that the power windows can be usedthe remote control key must be in position I orII. After the car has been running the powerwindows can be operated for several minuteseven when the remote control key has beenremoved, but not however after the door hasbeen opened.

Closing of the windows is stopped and thewindow is opened if anything prevents itsmovement. It is possible to force the pinch pro-tection when closing has been interrupted, e.g.with ice, by continuously holding the button upuntil the window is closed. The pinch protec-tion is reactivated after a brief pause.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noisewhen the rear windows are open is to alsoopen the front windows slightly.

Operating without autoMove one of the controls up/down gently. Thepower windows move up/down as long as thecontrol is held in position.

Operating with autoMove one of the controls up/down to the endposition and release it. The window runs auto-matically to its end position.

Remote control and central lockingbuttonsAll side windows can be opened/closed auto-matically with the remote control key or thecentral locking buttons:

Press and hold the lock button until thewindows start to open/close. To interruptopening/closing, press the lock buttonagain.

ResettingIf the battery is disconnected then the functionfor automatic opening must be reset so that itcan work correctly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the buttonto raise the window to its end position andhold it there for one second.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button againfor one second.

WARNING

Resetting must be carried out to ensure thatpinch protection works.

Door mirrors

G01

8518

Door mirror controls.

Adjusting1. Press the L button for the left-hand door

mirror or the R button for the right-handdoor mirror. The light in the button illumi-nates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in thecentre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The lightshould no longer be illuminated.

WARNING

The mirrors are the wide angle type for opti-mum surveillance. Objects may appear fur-ther away than they actually are.




03


Retractable power door mirrors*The mirrors can be retracted for parking/drivingin narrow spaces:

1. Press down the L and R buttons at thesame time.

2. Release them after approximately one sec-ond. The mirrors automatically stop in thefully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the Land R buttons at the same time. The mirrorsautomatically stop in the fully extended posi-tion.

Storing the position*The mirror positions are stored in the key mem-ory when the car has been locked with theremote control key. When the car is unlockedwith the same remote control key the mirrorsand the driver's seat adopt the stored positionswhen the driver's door is opened.

The function can be activated/deactivatedunder Car Key memory Seat & mirrorpositions. For a description of the menu sys-tem, see page 118.

Angling the door mirror when parkingThe door mirror can be angled down for thedriver to view the side of the road when parkingfor example.

Engage reverse gear and press the L or Rbutton.

When reverse gear is disengaged the mirrorautomatically returns to its original positionafter about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressingthe button labelled L or R respectively

Automatic retraction when lockingWhen the car is locked/unlocked with theremote control key the door mirrors are auto-matically retracted/extended.

The function can be activated/deactivatedunder Car settings Fold mirr. whenlocking. For a description of the menu system,see page 118.

Resetting to neutralMirrors that have been moved out of positionby an external force must be reset electricallyto the neutral position for electric retracting/extending to work correctly:

1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-tons.

2. Fold them out again with the L and R but-tons.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Home safe and approach lightingThe light on the door mirrors illuminates whenapproach lighting or home safe lighting isselected, see page 81.

Rear window and door mirrordefrosters

G02

1341

Use the defroster to quickly remove mistingand ice from the rear window and the door mir-rors.

Press the button once to start simultaneousrear window and door mirror defrosting. Thelight in the button indicates that the function isactive. Defrosting is deactivated automaticallyand its duration is controlled by the outsidetemperature.




03


The rear window is demisted/defrosted auto-matically if the car is started in an outside tem-perature lower than +7 °C.

Automatic defrosting can be selected underClimate settings Auto. rear defroster.Select between On or Off. For a description ofthe menu system, see page 118.

Interior rearview mirror

G02

1342

Control for dimming.

Manual dimmingBright light from behind could be reflected inthe rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use

dimming with the dimming control when lightsfrom behind are distracting:

1. Use dimming by moving the control intowards the passenger compartment.

2. Return to normal position by moving thecontrol towards the windscreen.

Automatic dimming*Bright light from behind is automaticallydimmed by the rearview mirror. The control isnot available in mirrors with automatic dim-ming.



Power sunroof*

03


GeneralThe sunroof controls are located in the roofpanel. The sunroof can be opened vertically atthe rear edge and horizontally. Key position I orII is required for the sunroof to be opened.

Horizontal opening

G01

7823

Horizontal opening, backward/forward.

Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

OpeningFor maximum sunroof opening, move the con-trol back to the position for automatic openingand release.

Open manually by pulling the control back-wards to the point of resistance for manualopening. The sunroof moves to maximum openposition as long as the button is keptdepressed.

ClosingClose manually by pushing the control for-wards to the point of resistance for manualclosing. The sunroof moves to closed positionas long as the button is kept depressed.

WARNING

Risk of crushing when sunroof is closed.The sunroof's pinch-protection functiononly operates during automatic closing, notmanual.

Close automatically by pressing the control tothe position for automatic closing and thenrelease it.

The power supply to the sunroof is switched offby removing the remote control key from theignition switch.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Remember to always switch off the powersupply to the sunroof by removing theremote control key if the driver leaves thecar.

Vertical opening

G02

8900

Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.

Open by pressing the rear edge of the con-trol upward.

Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-trol down.



Power sunroof*

03


Closing using the remote control key orcentral locking button

G02

1345

One long press on the lock button closes thesunroof and all the windows, see pages 41 and50. The doors and the tailgate are locked. Tointerrupt closing, press the lock button again.

WARNING

If the sunroof is closed using the remotecontrol key, check that no one is in dangerof becoming trapped in any way.

SunscreenThe sunroof features a manual, sliding interiorsunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto-matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip thehandle and slide the screen forward to close it.

Pinch protectionThe sunroof's pinch protection function is trig-gered if it is blocked by an object during auto-matic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will stopand automatically open to the previous posi-tion.



Starting the engine

03

95

Petrol and diesel engines

G02

1126

Ignition switch with remote control key, start andstop button (for more information, see page 71).

IMPORTANT

Do not insert the remote control key back-wards!

Grip the end with the detachable key blade,see page 44.

1. For cars with remote control key, insert theremote control key into the ignition switch.Gently push in the key until it is pulled in.

2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed 1.Depress the brake pedal in cars with auto-matic gearbox.

3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE buttonand then release it.

NOTE

A certain delay may occur for cars with the2.0D diesel engine before engine startingbegins – during this time the display showsEngine preheating.

The starter motor works until the engine hasstarted, but for no longer than 10 seconds (die-sel up to 60 seconds).

If the engine has not started after 10 seconds,try again by holding in the START/STOPENGINE button until the engine starts.

WARNING

Always remove the remote control key fromthe ignition switch when leaving the car,especially if there are children in the car.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key fromthe ignition switch while driving or when thecar is being towed. The steering lock couldbe activated which would mean that the carcannot be steered.

Never remove the remote control key withthe Keyless drive* function from the carwhile driving or during towing.

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higherthan normal for certain engine types duringcold starting. This is so that the emissionssystem can reach normal operating tem-perature as quickly as possible, which min-imises exhaust emissions and protects theenvironment.

Keyless driveFollow steps 2–3 for starting petrol and dieselengines.

NOTE

One precondition for starting the car is thatone of the car's remote control keys with thekeyless drive* function is located inside thepassenger compartment or the cargo area.

1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.



Starting the engine

03

96

Steering lockThe steering lock is deactivated when theremote control key is inserted into the ignitionswitch 2 and activated when the remote controlkey is removed from the ignition switch.

Activate the steering lock when leaving the carto reduce the risk of car theft.

2 On cars with Keyless drive* the steering lock is deactivated when the start button is pressed in for the first time. The steering lock is activated when the engine is switched off and the driver's dooris opened.



Starting the engine – Flexifuel

03


General information about startingwith FlexifuelThe engine is started in the same way as in apetrol-engined car.

In the event of starting difficultiesIf the engine does not start at the first startattempt:

• Make further attempts to start with theSTART/STOP ENGINE button.

If the engine still does not startThe outside temperature is lower than +5 °C:

1. Connect the engine block heater for atleast 1 hour.

2. Make further attempts to start with theSTART/STOP ENGINE button.

IMPORTANT

If the engine does not start despite repeatedstart attempts, contact an authorised Volvoworkshop.

Engine block heater*

G01

9754

Electrical input to the engine block heater.

When the temperature is expected to be lowerthan –10 °C and the car has been refuelled withbioethanol E85, an engine block heater shouldbe used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quickstarting of the engine.

The lower the temperature, the longer the timerequired with the engine block heater. At-20 °C the heater should be used for approx. 3hours.

Cars intended for E85 have an electric engineblock heater*. Starting and driving with a pre-heated engine involves significantly loweremissions and reduced fuel consumption. For

this reason you should aim to use the engineblock heater throughout the winter months.

WARNING

The engine block heater is powered by highvoltage. Fault tracing and repair of an elec-tric engine block heater and its electricalconnections must only be carried out by anauthorised Volvo workshop.

NOTE

Points to remember for carrying reservefuel:

In the event of stalling due to an empty fueltank, bioethanol E85 from a reserve fuel canmay make the engine difficult to start inextreme cold. This is avoided by filling thereserve fuel can with 95 octane petrol.

For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanolE 85 fuel, see page 204 and 279.



Starting the engine – Flexifuel

03

98

Fuel adaptationIf the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the carhas been driven on bioethanol E85 (or viceversa) then the engine may run slightlyunevenly for a time. For this reason it is impor-tant to allow the engine to accustom itself(adapt) to the new fuel mixture.

Adaptation takes place automatically when thecar is driven for a short period at an evenspeed.

IMPORTANT

After the fuel mixture in the tank has beenchanged an adaptation should be made bydriving at an even speed for about 15minutes.

If the battery has been discharged or discon-nected then a slightly longer period of drivingis required for the adaptation as the memoryfor the electronics has been cleared.



Starting the engine – external battery

03

99

Jump starting

G02

1347

If the battery is flat then the car can be startedwith current from another battery.

The following points are recommended whenusing a donor battery in order to avoid the riskof an explosion:

1. Set the remote control key into position 0,see page 71.

2. Ensure that the donor battery is 12 volt.

3. If the donor battery is in another car, switchoff the donor car's engine in the other carand ensure that the cars do not touch oneanother.

4. Connect the red jump lead to the positiveterminal on the donor battery .

5. Open the clips on the front cover of thebattery in your car and remove the cover,see page 239.

6. Connect the starter cable to the positiveterminal on the battery in your car,located under a folding plastic cover.

7. Connect one clamp from the black jumplead to the donor battery's negative termi-nal .

IMPORTANT

Connect the start cable carefully to avoidshort circuits with other components in theengine compartment.

8. Connect the other clamp to an earthingpoint, (right-hand engine mounting at thetop, the outer screw head) . Check thatthe jump lead clamps are fixed securely sothat there are no sparks during the startingprocedure.

9. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let theengine run a few minutes at a speed slightlyhigher than idle (1500 rpm).

10. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat-tery. Do not touch the crocodile clips dur-ing the start procedure. There is a risk ofsparks forming.

11. Remove the jump leads, first the black andthen the red. Make sure that none of theclamps on the black jump lead comes intocontact with the battery's positive terminalor the clamp connected to the red jumplead.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas,which is highly explosive. One spark, whichcan be generated if you connect a jump leadincorrectly, is sufficient to make the batteryexplode. The battery contains sulphuricacid, which can cause serious burns. If theacid comes into contact with eyes, skin orclothing, flush with large quantities of water.If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medicalattention immediately.



Gearboxes

03

100

Manual - five-speed

G02

1348

• Depress the clutch pedal fully during eachgear change.

• Take your foot off the clutch pedal betweengear changes.

• Follow the shifting pattern indicated.

For the best possible fuel economy, use thehighest gear possible as often as possible.

Reverse gear inhibitor - five-speed

G02

1349

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reversegear during normal forward travel.

Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-tionary.

• To engage reverse gear, the gear levermust first be put in position N. Reversegear cannot therefore be engaged directlyfrom fifth gear due to the reverse gearinhibitor.

Manual - six-speed

G02

1348

• Depress the clutch pedal fully during eachgear change.

• Take your foot off the clutch pedal betweengear changes.

• Follow the shifting pattern indicated.

For the best possible fuel economy, use thehighest gear possible as often as possible.



Gearboxes

03

101

Reverse gear inhibitor - six-speed

G02

1349

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reversegear during normal forward travel.

Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-tionary.

Automatic gearbox, Geartronic

G02

1350

The information display shows the position ofthe gear selector using the following indica-tions: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, seepage 65.

Gear positions

Parking position (P)Select P when starting the engine or when thecar is parked. The brake pedal must bedepressed to disengage the gear selector fromthe P position.

The gearbox is mechanically blocked when theP position is engaged. Activate the electricparking brake by pressing the button, seepage 109.

IMPORTANT

The car must be stationary when positionP is selected.

Reverse (R)The car must be stationary when position R isselected.

Neutral position (N)No gear is engaged and the engine can bestarted. Apply the parking brake if the car isstationary with the gear selector in position N.

Drive (D)D is the normal driving position. Shifting up anddown takes place automatically based on thelevel of acceleration and speed. The car mustbe stationary when the gear selector is movedto position D from position R.

Geartronic – manual gear positions (M)The driver can also change gear manuallyusing the Geartronic automatic gearbox. Thecar engine-brakes when the accelerator pedalis released.

Manual gearshift mode is obtained by movingthe lever from position D to the right-hand endposition at M. The information display shifts theindication from D to one of the figures " 1- 6",depending on which gear is engaged just then,see page 65.



Gearboxes

03

102

Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) tochange up a gear and release the lever, whichreturns to its rest position at M.

Pull the lever back towards – (minus) to changedown a gear and release the lever.

The manual gearshift mode M can be selectedat any time while driving.

To return to automatic driving mode: move thelever to the left-hand end position at D.

Geartronic automatically shifts down if thedriver allows the speed to decrease lower thana level suitable for the selected gear, in orderto avoid jerking and stalling.

NOTE

If the gearbox has a Sport programme thenthe gearbox will only become manual afterthe lever has been moved forwards or back-wards in its M position. The information dis-play then shifts the indication from S toshow which of the gears 1–6 is engaged.

Geartronic - Sport mode (S) 1

The Sport programme provides sportier cha-racteristics and allows higher engine speed forthe gears. At the same time it responds morequickly to acceleration. During active driving,

the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading toa delayed upshift.

Sport mode is obtained by moving the leverfrom D position to the right-hand end positionat M. The information display shifts the indica-tion from D to S.

Sport mode can be selected at any time whiledriving.

Geartronic - Winter modeIt can be easier to pull away on slippery roadsif 3rd gear is engaged manually.

1. Depress the brake pedal and move thegear lever from position D to the right-handend position at M - the instrument paneldisplay shifts the indication from D to thefigure 1.

2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the leverforward towards + (plus) twice - the displayshifts the indication from 1 to 3.

3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.

The gearbox "winter mode" means that the carmoves off with a lower engine speed andreduced engine power on the drive wheels.

Kick-downWhen the accelerator pedal is pressed all theway to the floor (beyond the position normally

regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear isimmediately engaged. This is known as kick-down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick-down position, the gearbox automaticallychanges up.

Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-tion is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety functionTo prevent overrevving the engine, the gearboxcontrol program has a protective downshiftinhibitor which prevents the kick-down func-tion.

Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-down which would result in an engine speedhigh enough to damage the engine. Nothinghappens if the driver still tries to shift down inthis way at high engine speed – the originalgear remains engaged.

When kick-down is activated the car canchange one or more gears at a time dependingon engine speed. The car changes up when theengine reaches its maximum speed in order toprevent damage to the engine.

1 Only on the 3.0 model.



Gearboxes

03

103

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

G02

1351

The gear selector can be moved forward andback freely between N and D. Other positionsare locked with a latch that is released with theinhibitor button on the gear selector.

With the inhibitor button depressed the levercan be moved forwards or backwards betweenP, R, N and D.

Automatic gear selector inhibitorThe automatic gearbox has special safety sys-tems:

KeylockTo remove the remote control key from theignition switch, the gear selector must be in theP position. The remote control key is locked inall other positions.

Parking position (P)Stationary car with engine running:

Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov-ing the gear selector to another position.

Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parkingposition (P)To be able to move the gear selector from P toother gear positions, the brake pedal must bedepressed and key position II must be acti-vated, see page 71.

Shiftlock – Neutral (N)If the gear selector is in the N position and thecar has been stationary for at least 3 seconds(irrespective of whether the engine is running)then the gear selector is locked.

To be able to move the gear selector from N toanother gear position, the brake pedal must bedepressed and key position II must be acti-vated, see page 71.

Deactivating the automatic gear selectorinhibitor

G02

1352

If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flatbattery, the gear selector must be moved fromthe P position so that the car can be moved.

Lift away the rubber mat on the floorbehind the centre console and open thehatch.

Fully insert the key blade. Press the keyblade down and keep it held down. Movethe gear selector from the P position. Forinformation on the key blade, seepage 44.



All-wheel drive – AWD*

03


All Wheel Drive is always engagedAll Wheel Drive means that the car is driving onall four wheels at the same time.

The power is automatically distributedbetween the front and rear wheels. An elec-tronically controlled clutch system distributesthe power to the wheels that have the best gripon the current road surface. This provides thebest traction and prevents wheel spin. Undernormal driving conditions, the majority ofpower is transmitted to the front wheels.

All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain,snow and icy conditions.



Foot brake

03

105

GeneralThe car is equipped with two brake circuits. Ifone brake circuit is damaged then this willmean that the brakes engage at a deeper leveland harder pressure on the pedal is needed toproduce the normal braking effect.

The driver's brake pedal pressure is reinforcedby a brake servo.

WARNING

The brake servo only works when the engineis running.

If the brake is used when the engine is switchedoff then the pedal will feel stiff and more forcemust be used to brake the car.

In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavyload the brakes can be relieved by using enginebraking. Engine braking is most efficiently usedif the same gear is used downhill as up.

For more general information on heavy loadson the car, see page 275.

Anti-lock braking systemThe car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lockBraking System) which prevents the wheelsfrom locking during braking. This means theability to steer is maintained and it is easier toswerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration

may be felt in the brake pedal when this isengaged and this is normal.

A short test of the ABS system is made auto-matically after the engine has been startedwhen the driver releases the brake pedal. Afurther automatic test of the ABS system maybe made when the car reaches 40 km/h. Thetest may be experienced as pulses in the brakepedal.

Cleaning the brake discsCoatings of dirt and water on the brake discsmay result in delayed brake function. This delayis minimised by cleaning the brake linings.

Manual cleaning is advisable with wet roadsurfaces, prior to long-stay parking and afterthe car has been washed. Carry this out bybraking gently during a short period while enroute.

Emergency Brake AssistanceEmergency Brake Assistance EBA (EmergencyBrake Assistance) helps to increase brakeforce and so reduce braking distance. The EBAsystem detects the driver's braking style andincreases brake force as necessary. The brakeforce can be reinforced up to the level when theABS system is engaged. The EBA function isinterrupted when the pressure on the brakepedal is reduced.

NOTE

When EBA is activated the brake pedal low-ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)the brake pedal as long as necessary. If thebrake pedal is released then all brakingceases.

Symbols in the combined instrumentpanel


Constant glow – Check thebrake fluid level. If the level islow, fill with brake fluid andcheck for the cause of the brakefluid loss.

Constant glow for 2 secondswhen the engine is started –There was a fault in the brakesystem's ABS function whenthe engine was last running.



Foot brake

03

106

WARNING

If and illuminate at the sametime then a fault may have arisen in thebrake system.

If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor-mal at this stage, drive carefully to the near-est authorised Volvo workshop and havethe brake system checked.

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in thebrake fluid reservoir, do not drive furtherbefore topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid mustbe investigated.



Hill Descent Control (HDC)

03

107

General 1

HDC can be compared to an automatic enginebrake. When you release the accelerator ondownhill gradients the car is normally brakedby means of the engine striving for low engineidling speeds, so-called engine braking. Butthe steeper the road and the more load there isin the car, the faster the car rolls despite enginebraking. In order to then reduce speed thedriver has to assist using the footbrake.

The function makes it possible to increase/reduce speed on steep downhill gradients, witha foot only on the accelerator pedal, withoutusing the footbrake. The brake system brakesitself and automatically provides a low andeven speed, so allowing the driver to fully focuson steering.

HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradientswith an uneven road surface and slippery sec-tions. E.g. when launching a boat on a trailerfrom a ramp.

WARNING

HDC does not work in all situations, but isinstead only intended to be supplementaryassistance.

The driver always has ultimate responsibilitythat the car is driven safely.

Function

G01

7426

HDC is engaged or disengaged using a switchon the centre console. An indicator lamp in thebutton illuminates when the function isswitched on. When HDC is operating the

symbol illuminates and the displayshows Hill descent control ON.

The function only operates in first gear positionand in reverse gear. For an automatic gearbox,gear position 1 must be selected, which isshown with the figure 1 in the trip computerdisplay, see page 101.

NOTE

HDC cannot be activated in an automaticgearbox with the gear selector in positionD.

OperationHDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of10 km/h forwards with engine braking and7 km/h backwards. However, any speed withinthe gear's speed register can be selected usingthe accelerator pedal. When the acceleratorpedal is released, the car is braked quickly to10 or 7 km/h respectively, irrespective of thehill's gradient and without the need for the foot-brake.

The brake lights come on automatically whenthe function is operating. The driver can brakeor stop the car at any time by using the foot-brake.

HDC is deactivated:

• with the on/off button on the centre con-sole

• if a gear higher than 1 is selected on amanual gearbox

• if a gear higher than 1 is selected on anautomatic gearbox, or if the gear selectoris moved to position D.

1 HDC is only available on the XC70 and is standard.



Hill Descent Control (HDC)

03

108

The function can be disengaged at any time. Ifit takes place on a steep downhill gradient thenthe braking effect will not release directly, butslowly instead.

NOTE

When HDC is activated, engine responseduring acceleration seems slower than nor-mal.



Parking brake

03

109

Parking brake, electricAn electric parking brake has the same appli-cations as a manual parking brake, e.g. whenstarting uphill.

FunctionA faint electric motor noise can be heard whenthe parking brake is being applied. The noisecan also be heard during the automatic func-tion checking of the parking brake.

If the car is stationary when the parking brakeis applied then it only acts on the rear wheels.If it is applied when the car is moving then thenormal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake actson all four wheels. Brake function changes overto the rear wheels when the car is almost sta-tionary.

Low battery voltageIf the battery voltage is too low then the parkingbrake can neither be released nor applied.Connect a donor battery if the battery voltageis too low, see page 99.

How to apply the parking brake

G02

1354

Parking brake control

1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Press the control.

3. Release the foot brake pedal and makesure that the car is at a standstill position.

• When parking the vehicle, always engage1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put thegear selector in position P (for automaticgearbox).

The symbol in the combined instrumentpanel flashes until the parking brake is fullyapplied. When the symbol illuminates the park-ing brake is applied.

In an emergency the parking brake can beapplied when the vehicle is moving by depress-

ing the control. When the control is released orthe accelerator pedal is depressed the brakingis interrupted.

NOTE

In the event of emergency braking at speedsabove 10 km/h a signal sounds during thebraking procedure.

Parking on a hillIf the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheelsaway from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill, turn thewheels towards the kerb.

How to release the parking brake

G02

1359

Parking brake control



Parking brake

03

110

Cars with manual gearbox

Releasing manually1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition

switch.

2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.

3. Pull the control.

NOTE

The parking brake can also be releasedmanually by depressing the clutch pedalinstead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom-mends the use of the brake pedal.

Releasing automatically1. Start the engine.

2. Ease up the clutch and depress the accel-erator.

IMPORTANT

It is possible to release the parking brakeautomatically, even when the gear lever is inneutral position, if the engine is running.

Cars with automatic gearbox

Releasing manually1. Put the seatbelt on.

2. Insert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch.

3. Depress the brake pedal firmly.

4. Pull the control.

Releasing automatically1. Put the seatbelt on.

2. Start the engine.

3. Move the gear selector to position D or Rand depress the accelerator.

NOTE

For safety reasons, the parking brake is onlyreleased automatically if the engine is run-ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. Theparking brake is released immediately oncars with automatic gearbox when theaccelerator pedal is depressed and the gearselector is in position D or R.

Heavy load uphillA heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause thecar to roll backward when the parking brake isreleased automatically on a steep incline.Avoid this by depressing the control while driv-ing off. Release the control when the engineachieves traction.

Cars with Keyless drive functionRelease manually by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button, then depress the brakeor clutch pedal and pull the control.

Symbols


Read the message on the infor-mation display

A flashing symbol indicates thatthe parking brake is applied. Ifthe symbol flashes in any othersituation then this means that afault has arisen. Read the mes-sage on the information display.

Messages

G01

6166



Parking brake

03

111

Park brake not fully released - A fault is pre-venting the parking brake from being released.Contact an authorised Volvo workshop. Awarning signal sounds if you pull away with thiserror message.

Parking brake not applied - A fault is pre-venting the parking brake from being applied.Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo work-shop if the message remains.

The message is also illuminated on cars withmanual gearbox when the car is driven at lowspeed with the door open in order to alert thedriver that the parking brake may have beenunintentionally disengaged.

Parking brake Service required - A fault hasarisen. Contact a Volvo workshop if the faultremains.

If the car has to be parked before the fault hasbeen rectified then the wheels must be turnedas if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged(manual gearbox) or the gear selector must bein position P (automatic gearbox).

Replacing the brake liningsThe rear brake linings must be replaced by anauthorised Volvo workshop due to the designof the electric parking brake.



HomeLink EU*

03


General

G02

9471

HomeLink is a programmable remote controlwhich can control up to three different devices(e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light-ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing soreplace their remote controls. HomeLink issupplied built into the left-hand sun visor.

HomeLink's panel consists of three program-mable buttons and one indicator lamp.

NOTE

HomeLink is designed to be inoperable ifthe car is locked from the outside.

Save the original remote controls for futureprogramming (e.g. for purchasing a newcar).

Erase the programming for the buttonswhen selling the car.

Metallic sun visors should not be used incars equipped with HomeLink. This couldhave a negative effect on the HomeLinkfunction.

OperationWhen HomeLink is fully programmed it can beused in place of the separate original remotecontrols.

Press the programmed button to activate thegarage door, alarm system etc. The indicatorlamp illuminates for the time that the button iskept depressed.

NOTE

In the event that the ignition is not activated,HomeLink operates for 30 minutes after thedriver's door has been opened.

The original remote controls can of course beused in parallel with HomeLink.

WARNING

If HomeLink is used to operate a garagedoor or gate, ensure that nobody is in thevicinity of the door or gate while it is inmotion.

Do not use the HomeLink remote control forany garage door that does not have safetystop and safety reverse. The garage doormust react immediately when it detects thatsomething is preventing its movement, andstop directly and reverse. A garage doorwithout these characteristics could causepersonal injury. For further information, ringthe HomeLink Hotline: 008000 466 354 65(free of charge). They can also be contactedvia the Internet: www.homelink.com.

Programming for the first timeThe first step erases the memory in HomeLinkand must not be carried out when only oneindividual button is being reprogrammed.

1. Depress the two outer buttons and do notrelease until the indicator lamp starts toflash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash-ing indicates that HomeLink is set in "learnmode" and is ready to be programmed.

2. Position the original remote control 2-8 cmfrom HomeLink. Monitor the indicatorlamp.



HomeLink EU*

03


The particular distance that is requiredbetween the original remote control andHomeLink depends on the programming ofthe device in question. Perhaps severalattempts will be required at different dis-tances. Maintain each position for approx.15 seconds before trying a new one.

3. Depress the button for the original remotecontrol and the button to be programmedon HomeLink simultaneously. Do notrelease the buttons until the indicator lamphas changed over from slow to rapid flash-ing. The rapid flashing indicates successfulprogramming.

4. Test the programming by depressing theprogrammed button on HomeLink andwatching the indicator lamp:

• Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu-minates with a constant glow when thebutton is kept depressed, this indicatesthat the programming is complete. Thegarage door, gate or similar should nowbe activated when the programmedHomeLink button is depressed.

• Glow not constant: The indicator lampflashes quickly for approx. 2 secondsand then changes over to a constantglow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds

and indicates that the device has a "roll-ing code". The garage door, gate or sim-ilar is not activated when the pro-grammed HomeLink button isdepressed. Continue the programmingin accordance with the following.

5. Locate the "programming button 1" on thereceiver for the garage door for example,normally located close to the antenna'sbracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-culty in finding the button, look in the man-ufacturer's manual or call the HomeLinkHotline: 008000 466 354 65 (free ofcharge). They can also be contacted viathe Internet: www.homelink.com

6. Depress and release the "programmingbutton". The button flashes for approx. 30seconds and the next step must be carriedout within this period.

7. Depress the programmed button onHomeLink, while the "programming but-ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed forapprox. 3 seconds and then release.Repeat the press/hold/release sequenceup to 3 times to conclude the program-ming.

Programming individual buttonsTo reprogram an individual button, proceed inaccordance with the following:

1. Depress the required button on HomeLinkand do not release until step 3 has beencompleted.

2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLinkstarts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,position the original remote control 2-8 cmfrom HomeLink. Monitor the indicatorlamp.

The particular distance that is requiredbetween the original remote control andHomeLink depends on the programming ofthe device in question. Perhaps severalattempts will be required at different dis-tances. Maintain each position for approx.15 seconds before trying a new one.

3. Depress the button on the original remotecontrol. The indicator lamp will start toflash. When the flashing has changed overfrom a slow to a rapid flashing - releaseboth buttons. The rapid flashing indicatessuccessful programming.

4. Test the programming by depressing theprogrammed button on HomeLink andwatching the indicator lamp:

1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.



HomeLink EU*

03


• Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu-minates with a constant glow when thebutton is kept depressed, this indicatesthat the programming is complete. Thegarage door, gate or similar should nowbe activated when the programmedHomeLink button is depressed.

• Glow not constant: The indicator lampflashes quickly for approx. 2 secondsand then changes over to a constantglow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-ess is repeated for approx. 20 secondsand indicates that the device has a "roll-ing code". The garage door, gate or sim-ilar is not activated when the pro-grammed HomeLink button isdepressed. Continue the programmingin accordance with the following.

5. Locate the "programming button 2" on thereceiver for the garage door for example,normally located close to the antenna'sbracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-culty in finding the button, look in the man-ufacturer's manual or call the HomeLinkHotline: 008000 466 354 65 (free ofcharge). They can also be contacted viathe Internet: www.homelink.com

6. Depress and release the "programmingbutton". The button flashes for approx. 30

seconds and the next step must be carriedout within this period.

7. Depress the programmed button onHomeLink, while the "programming but-ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed forapprox. 3 seconds and then release.Repeat the press/hold/release sequenceup to 3 times to conclude the program-ming.

Erasing programmingIt is only possible to erase the programming forall the buttons on HomeLink, not for individualbuttons.

Depress the two outer buttons and do notrelease until the indicator lamp starts toflash after approx. 20 seconds.> HomeLink is now set in so-called "learn

mode" and is ready to be programmedonce more, see page 112.

2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.



03

115


G02

0908


Menus and messages........................................................................... 118Climate control...................................................................................... 123Fuel-driven engine block heaterand passenger compartment heater*................................................... 131Fuel-driven additional heater*............................................................... 134Audio system........................................................................................ 135RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen* ....................... 147Trip computer........................................................................................ 152Compass*.............................................................................................. 154DSTC – Stability and traction control system....................................... 155Adapting driving characteristics........................................................... 156Cruise control*...................................................................................... 157Adaptive cruise control*........................................................................ 158Distance Alert........................................................................................ 164Collision Warning with Auto Brake*...................................................... 167Driver Alert System – DAC*................................................................... 172Driver Alert System - LDW*................................................................... 175Park Assist*........................................................................................... 178BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System................................................ 181Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................ 185Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................ 188Built-in phone*...................................................................................... 193


04COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE


04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

04


Centre consoleSome functions are controlled from the centreconsole via the menu system or via the keypadin the steering wheel. Each function is descri-bed under its respective section.

The current menu level is shown at the top rightof the centre console's display.

Centre console controls

G02

1360

Centre console with information display and con-trols for menus.

Navigation button – scrolls and selectsamong menu options

ENTER – selects menu options

MENU – leads to the menu system

EXIT – leads back one step in the menustructure. A long press leads out from themenu system.

Steering wheel keypad

G02

1363

ENTER*

EXIT*

Navigation buttons – up/down.

If the steering wheel keypad has ENTER andEXIT then these buttons, and the navigationbuttons, have the same functions as the con-trols in the centre console.

Search pathsAccess to some functions is provided directlyvia the function buttons and some are reachedvia the menu system.

The search paths to the menu system's func-tions are stated in the form: Car settings

Lock settings, which presupposes that fol-lowing is carried out before:

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Menu and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Submenu and press ENTER.

The navigation button can be used instead ofENTER and EXIT when navigating the menuhierarchy. The right-hand arrow is equal toENTER and the left-hand arrow to EXIT.

The menu options are numbered and can alsobe selected directly with the numerical keypad(only 1 – 9).

Menu overviewThe phone and audio sources have differentmain menus. The following menus are includedin all main menus:

Car Key memory

Seat & mirror positions*

Car settings

Fold mirr. when locking*

Collision warning settings*

Information

Light settings

Lock settings



Menus and messages

04


Reduced Guard 1

Parking camera settings*

Steering force level*

Unit settings

Climate settings

Automatic blower adjust

Auto. rear defroster

Recirculation timer

Reset climate settings

Main menu AM

Audio settings 2

Sound stage

Equalizer front

Equalizer rear

Auto. volume control

Reset the audio settings

Main menu FM

FM settings

News

TP (Traffic information)

Radio text

PTY (Program type)

Advanced radio settings

Audio settings

Main menu DAB* 3

Main menu CD

Random

Off

Folder 4

Disc4

Single disc 5

All discs5

CD settings

Disc text*

News

TP (Traffic information)

Audio settings

Main menu AUX

AUX input volume

Audio settings

Main menu, Bluetooth

Last 10 missed calls

Last 10 received calls

Last 10 dialled calls

Phone book

Search

Copy fr. mobile phone

Bluetooth*

Connect phone

Change phone

Remove phone

Phone settings

Call options

Sounds and volume

Synchronise phone book

1 Certain models.2 The menu option for audio settings is available in all audio sources.3 See page 143.4 Only in systems that allow the playback of MP3 and WMA format audio files.5 Only in systems with CD changer.



Menus and messages

04

120

Main menu, built-in phone

Call register

Last 10 missed calls

Last 10 received calls

Last 10 dialled calls

Erase list

Call duration

Phone book

New contact

Search

Copy all

Erase SIM

Erase phone

Memory status

Messages

Read

Write new

Message settings

Call options

Send my number

Call waiting

Automatic answer

Voice mail number

Diversions

Phone settings

Network selection

SIM security

Edit PIN code

Sounds and volume

IDIS

Reset Phone settings

Combined instrument panel

G02

1364

Information display and controls for menus.

READ – access to message list and mes-sage confirmation.

Thumbwheel – browse between menuoptions.

RESET – reset the active function. Used incertain cases to select/activate a function,see the explanation under each respectivefunction.

The menus shown on the information displaysin the combined instrument panel are con-trolled with the left-hand stalk switch. Themenus shown depend on key position, seepage 71. If a message appears then this mustbe acknowledged with READ for the menus tobe shown.



Menus and messages

04

121

Menu overview 6

To empty fuel tank

Average

Instantaneous

Average speed

Lane departure warning

Tyre pressure Calibration

Current speed

Park heat timer 1/2

Park vent timer 1/2

Park timer mode

Direct start Park heat

Direct start Park el.heat

Direct start Park vent

Additional heat auto

Rest heat start

DSTC

Message

G02

1365

Text message in the information display.

When a warning, information or indicator sym-bol illuminates, a corresponding messageappears on the information display. An errormessage is stored in a memory list until thefault is rectified.

Press READ to acknowledge and browsebetween the messages.

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you areusing the trip computer, the message mustbe read (press READ) before the previousactivity can be resumed.


Stop safely Stop and switch off theengine. Serious risk ofdamage. Contact anauthorised Volvo work-shop.

Stop engine Stop and switch off theengine. Serious risk ofdamage. Contact anauthorised Volvo work-shop.

Service urgent Have the car checkedby an authorised Volvoworkshop immediately.

Servicerequired

Have the car checkedby an authorised Volvoworkshop as soon aspossible.

See manual Read the owner's man-ual.

Book time formaintenance

Time to book regularservice at an authorisedVolvo workshop.

6 Certain menu options *.



Menus and messages

04

122


Time for regularmaintenance

Time for regular serviceat an authorised Volvoworkshop. The timing isdetermined by the num-ber of kilometres driven,number of monthssince the last service,engine running time andoil grade.

Maintenanceoverdue

If the service intervalsare not followed thenthe warranty does notcover any damagedparts. Contact anauthorised Volvo work-shop for service.

TemporarilyOFF

A function has beentemporarily switchedoff and is reset auto-matically while drivingor after starting again.

Power savemode

The audio system isswitched off to saveenergy. Charge the bat-tery.



Climate control

04


General

Air conditioningThe car is equipped with Electronic ClimateControl* (ECC) or Electronic Temperature Con-trol (ETC). The climate control system cools orheats as well as dehumidifies the air in the pas-senger compartment.

NOTE

The air conditioning can be switched off, butto ensure the best possible climate comfortin the passenger compartment and to pre-vent the windows from misting, it shouldalways be on.

Actual temperatureThe temperature you select corresponds to thephysical experience with reference to factorssuch as air speed, humidity and solar radia-tion* etc. in and around the car.

The system includes a sun sensor* whichdetects on which side the sun is shining intothe passenger compartment. This means thatthe temperature can differ between the rightand left-hand air vents despite the controlsbeing set for the same temperature on bothsides.

Sensor location• The sun sensor* is located on the top side

of the dashboard.

• The temperature sensor for the passengercompartment is located below the climatecontrol panel.

• The outside temperature sensor is locatedon the door mirror.

• The humidity sensor* is located in the inte-rior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors withclothing or other objects.

Side windows and sunroofTo ensure that the air conditioning works opti-mally, the side windows, and sunroof if appro-priate, should be closed.

Misting windowsRemove misting on the insides of the windowsby primarily using the defroster function.

To reduce the risk of misting, clean the win-dows with normal window cleaning agent.

Temporary shut-off of the airconditioningWhen the engine requires full power, e.g. for fullacceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the

air conditioning can be temporarily switchedoff. There may then be a temporary increase intemperature.

CondensationIn warm weather, condensation from the airconditioning may drip under the car. This isnormal.

Ice and snowRemove ice and snow from the climate controlsystem air intake (the grille between the bonnetand the windscreen).

Fault tracing and repairEntrust fault tracing and repair of the climatecontrol system to an authorised Volvo work-shop only.

RefrigerantThe climate control system contains R134arefrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo-rine, which means that it is harmless to theozone layer. Have an authorised Volvo work-shop carry out the filling/changing of refriger-ant.

Total airing functionThe function opens/closes all side windowssimultaneously and can be used for example toquickly air the car during hot weather, seepage 42.



Climate control

04


Passenger compartment filterAll air entering the car's passenger compart-ment is cleaned with a filter. This must bereplaced at regular intervals. Follow the VolvoService Programme for the recommendedreplacement intervals. If the car is used in aseverely contaminated environment, it may benecessary to replace the filter more often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger com-partment filter. Make sure that the correctfilter is fitted.

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)This option keeps the passenger compartmentclear of allergy and asthma inducing sub-stances. For more information on CZIP, see thebrochure included with the purchase of the car.The following is included:

• An enhanced fan function that means thatthe fan starts when the car is opened withthe remote control key. The fan fills thepassenger compartment with fresh air. Thefunction starts when required and is dis-engaged automatically after a time or whenone of the passenger compartment doorsis opened. The time interval during which

the fan blows will be gradually reduceduntil the car is 4 years old.

• Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). A fullyautomatic system that cleans the air in thepassenger compartment from contami-nants such as particles, hydrocarbons,nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone.

Use of tested materials in the interiorequipment.The materials have been developed in order tominimise the quantity of dust in the passengercompartment and they contribute to makingthe passenger compartment easier to keepclean. The carpets in both the passenger com-partment and the cargo area are removableand easy to remove and clean. Use cleaningagents and car care products recommendedby Volvo, see page 264.

NOTE

In cars with CZIP the IAQS air filter must bereplaced every 15000 km or once per year.In cars without CZIP the IAQS air filter mustbe replaced at the normal service.

Menu settingsIt is possible to change the default settings forthree of the climate control system's functionsvia the centre console, see page 118:

• Fan speed in automatic mode*, seepage 127.

• Recirculation timer for passenger com-partment air, see page 128.

• Automatic rear window defrosting, seepage 91.

All climate control system functions are set tooriginal position with RESET via the display.

Air distribution

G01

7699

The incoming air is divided between 20differentvents in the passenger compartment.

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTOmode*.

If necessary it can be controlled manually, seepage 129.



Climate control

04

125

Air vents in the dashboard

G02

1367

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the outer vents at the side windows toremove misting.

A certain air flow always comes from the ventsin order to maintain a good climate in the pas-senger compartment.

Air vents in the door pillars

G02

1368

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist-ing.

Aim the vents into the passenger compartmentto maintain a comfortable climate in the rearseat.

Remember that small children may be sensitiveto air flows and draughts.

Climate control

Electronic Temperature Control, ETC

G01

7723

Fan

Air distribution

Heated front seats, left-hand side

Heated front seats, right-hand side

Temperature control

AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off

Rear window and door mirror defrosters,see page 91

Max. defroster

Recirculation



Climate control

04


Electronic climate control, ECC

G02

1371

Ventilated front seats*, left-hand side

Fan

Heated front seats, left-hand side

Air distribution

Heated front seats, right-hand side

AUTO

Ventilated front seats*, right-hand side

Temperature control, right-hand side

AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off

Rear window and door mirror defrosters,see page 91

Max. defroster

Recirculation/Air quality system

Temperature control, left-hand side

Operation

Ventilated front seats*Ventilated front seats can onlybe specified when ECC isinstalled in the car. The venti-lation system consists of fansin the seats and backreststhat draw air through the seatupholstery. The cooling effect

increases the cooler the passenger compart-ment air becomes.

The ventilation is regulated from the climatecontrol and takes seat temperature, solar radi-ation and outside temperature into considera-tion.

The ventilation can be used at the same timeas seat heating. For example, the function canbe used to dry damp from clothing.

The ventilation system can be activated whenthe engine is running. There are three comfortlevels that produce different cooling and dehu-midification outputs:

• Comfort level III: press the button once formaximum output – three lamps illuminate.

• Comfort level II: press the button twice forlower output – two lamps illuminate.

• Comfort level I: press the button threetimes for the lowest output – one lamp illu-minates.

Press the button four times to switch off thefunction – no lamps illuminate.

NOTE

The seat ventilation should be used carefullyby people sensitive to draughts. Comfortlevel one is recommended for long-termuse.

IMPORTANT

The seat ventilation cannot be started whenpassenger compartment temperature isbelow 5 °C. This is to avoid chilling anyonesitting in the seat.



Climate control

04

127

Fan 1

Turn the knob to increase ordecrease fan speed. If AUTOis selected then fan speed isregulated automatically. Thepreviously set fan speed isdisengaged.

NOTE

If the fan is fully disengaged the air condi-tioning is not engaged which may result in arisk of misting windows.

Heated seats

Front seatsPress the button once for thehighest heat level – threelamps illuminate.

Press the button twice for alower heat level – two lampsilluminate.

Press the button three times for the lowest heatlevel – one lamp illuminates.

Press the button four times to switch off theheat – no lamps illuminate.

Air distributionThe figure consists of threebuttons. When the buttonsare pressed a lamp in front ofthe respective part of the fig-ure illuminates and showswhich air distribution isselected, see page 129.

Auto1

The Auto function automati-cally regulates temperature,air conditioning, fan speed,recirculation, and air distribu-tion.

The function automaticallyregulates temperature, air conditioning, fanspeed, recirculation, and air distribution.

If you select one or more manual functions, theother functions continue to be controlled auto-matically. The air quality sensor is engaged andall manual settings are switched off whenAUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTOCLIMATE.

Fan speed in automatic mode can be set underClimate settings Automatic bloweradjust. Select between Low, Normal orHigh.

For a description of the menu system, seepage 118.

Temperature controlECC: The temperatures onthe driver and passengersides can be set independ-ently.

ETC: The whole of the pas-senger compartment is regu-

lated using the knob.

When the car is started, the most recent settingis resumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened byselecting a higher/lower temperature thanthe actual temperature required.

AC – Air conditioning on/offON: The air conditioning iscontrolled by the system'sAuto function. This way,incoming air is cooled anddehumidified.

1 Only applies to ECC.



Climate control

04


OFF: When the defroster function is activatedthe air conditioning is switched on automati-cally (can be switched off using the AC button).

DefrosterUsed to quickly remove mist-ing and ice from the wind-screen and side windows. Airflowing to the windows. Thelight in the defroster buttonilluminates when the functionis active.

The following also takes place in order to pro-vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-ger compartment:

• the air conditioning is automaticallyengaged

• recirculation is automatically disengaged.

The air conditioning can be disengaged man-ually using the AC button. When the defrosterfunction is switched off the climate control sys-tem returns to the previous settings.

Recirculation/Air quality system

RecirculationWhen recirculation isengaged the right-handorange light in the button illu-minates*. The function isselected to shut out bad air,exhaust gases etc. from thepassenger compartment. The

air in the passenger compartment is recircula-ted, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car whenthis function is activated. If the air in the carrecirculates for too long, there is a risk of mist-ing on the insides of the windows.

TimerWith the timer function activated the systemwill exit manually activated recirculation modeaccording to a time that depends on the out-side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate thefunction under Climate settingsRecirculation timer. For a description of themenu system, see page 118.

NOTE

When Defroster is selected, recirculation isalways deactivated.

Air quality system*The air quality system sepa-rates gases and particles toreduce the levels of odoursand pollution in the passengercompartment. If the outsideair is contaminated then theair intake is closed and the air

is recirculated. When the AUTO button isdepressed the air quality sensor is alwaysengaged.

Activating recirculation/air qualitysensor 2

Switch between the threefunctions by pressing the but-ton repeatedly.

• The left-hand orange lamp illuminates – theair quality sensor is disengaged.

• The centre green lamp illuminates – recir-culation not engaged, providing it is notrequired for cooling in hot weather.

• The right-hand orange lamp illuminates –recirculation is engaged.

2 Only applies to ETC.



Climate control

04

129

NOTE

The air quality sensor should always beengaged in order to obtain the best air in thepassenger compartment.

Recirculation is limited in cold weather toavoid misting.

If the insides of the windows start mistingup, disengage the air quality sensor, and thedefroster functions for the windscreen, theside and the rear windows should also beused to demist the windows.

Activating recirculationSwitch between recircula-tion2 On/Off by pressing thebutton repeatedly. The lampilluminates when recirculationis engaged.

Air distribution table

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some airflows from the air vents.The air is not recirculated.Air conditioning is alwaysengaged.

To remove ice and mist-ing quickly.

Air to the floor and win-dows. Some air flowsfrom the dashboard airvents.

To ensure comfortableconditions and gooddemisting in cold orhumid weather.

Air to windscreen andside windows. Some airflows from the air vents.

To prevent misting andicing in a cold and humidclimate, (not at too low fanspeed to enable this).

Air to floor and from dash-board air vents.

In sunny weather withcool outside tempera-tures.

2 Only applies to ETC.



Climate control

04

130

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Airflow to windows andfrom dashboard air vents.

To ensure good comfortin warm, dry weather.

Air to floor. Some air flowsto the dashboard air ventsand windows.

To direct heat or cold tothe floor

Airflow to the head andchest from the dashboardair vents.

To ensure efficient cool-ing in warm weather.

Airflow to windows, fromdashboard air vents andto the floor.

To provide cooler airalong the floor or warmerair higher up in coldweather or hot, dryweather.



Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

04


Fuel-driven heater

General information about the parkingheaterThe parking heater heats the engine and pas-senger compartment and can be starteddirectly or with the timer.

Two different times can be selected using thetimer. Here, time refers to the time when the caris heated and ready. The car's electronic sys-tem calculates when heating should be startedbased on the outside temperature.

The heater cannot start if the outside tempera-ture exceeds 15 °C. At –10 °C or lower themaximum running time of the parking heater is50 minutes.

WARNING

The car must be outdoors when the parkingheater is used.

NOTE

When the parking heater is active there maybe smoke from the right-hand wheel hous-ing, which is perfectly normal.

Refuelling

WARNING!AVERTISSEMENT!

ACHTUNG!

G02

1395

Warning decal on fuel filler flap.

WARNING

Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switchoff the fuel-driven heater before starting torefuel.

Check the information display to see thatthe parking heater is switched off. When itis running, the information display showsPark heat ON.

Parking on a hillIf the car is parked on a steep hill, the front ofthe car should point downhill to ensure thatthere is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.

Battery and fuelIf the battery has insufficient charge or the fuellevel is too low, the parking heater will beswitched off automatically and a messageappears on the information display. Acknowl-edge the message by pressing the indicatorstalk READ button once, see page 132.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the parking heater com-bined with short journeys may discharge thebattery and impair starting.

The car should be driven for the same timeas the heater is used to ensure that the car'sbattery is recharged adequately to replacethe energy consumed by the heater when itis used on a regular basis.




04


Operation

G02

1364

READ button

Thumbwheel

RESET button

For more information on the information dis-play and READ, see page 120.

Symbols and display messagesWhen one of the timer's settings orDirect start is activated, the infor-

mation symbol in the combined instrumentpanel illuminates while the information displayshows an explanatory text and a further illumi-nated symbol. The table shows symbols anddisplay texts that appear.

Sym-bol

Display Specification

G02

5102

Fuelheater ON

The heater isswitched on and run-ning.

G02

5102

Timer isset forFuelheater

Reminder that theheater will start atthe set time after thecar has been left,when the remotecontrol key isremoved from theignition switch.

HeaterstoppedLow bat-tery

The heater has beenstopped by the car'selectronics in orderto facilitate startingthe engine.

Heaterstopped -Low fuellevel

The heater has beenstopped by the car'selectronics in orderto facilitate startingthe engine and about50 km driving.

A display text clears automatically after a timeor after one press on the indicator stalkREAD button.

Direct start and immediate stop1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start

Park heat.

2. Press RESET to select between ON andOFF.

ON: Parking heater switched on manually orwith programmed timer.

OFF: Parking heater switched off.

Following the direct start of the heater it will beactivated for 50 minutes.

Heating of the passenger compartment willbegin as soon as the engine coolant hasreached the correct temperature.

NOTE

The car can be started and driven while theparking heater is running.

Setting the timerThe time when the car shall be used and heatedis specified with the timer.

Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.

NOTE

The time can only be programmed in keyposition I, see page 71.




04


1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heattimer 1.

2. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-ing hours setting.

3. Select the required hour using the thumb-wheel.

4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-ing minutes setting.

5. Select the required minute using thethumbwheel.

6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.

7. Press RESET to activate the timer.

After setting Park heat timer 1 a second starttime can be programmed with Park heat timer2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel.

Set the alternative time in the same way asPark heat timer 1.

Deactivating a timer-started heaterA timer-started heater can be switched offmanually before the set time has elapsed. Pro-ceed as follows:

1. Press READ.

2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the textPark heat timer 1 or 2.> The text ON flashes on the display.

3. Press RESET.

> The text OFF is shown with a constantglow and the heater is switched OFF.

A timer-started heater can be switched off inaccordance with the instructions in the section"Direct start and immediate stop", seepage 132.

Clock/timerThe heater's time is connected to the car'sclock.

NOTE

All timer programming will be cleared if thecar's clock is reset.



Fuel-driven additional heater*

04


Additional heater (diesel)

G02

1364

READ button

Thumbwheel

RESET button

In diesel-engined cars the additional heatermay be required for achieving the correct tem-perature in the passenger compartment duringcold weather.

The heater starts automatically when extraheat is required when the engine is running.

The heater is switched off automatically whenthe correct temperature is reached or when theengine is switched off.

NOTE

When the additional heater is active theremay be smoke from the right-hand wheelhousing which is perfectly normal.

Auto mode or shutdownThe additional heater can be switched off forshort distances if required.

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additionalheat auto.

2. Press RESET to select between ON andOFF.



Audio system

04


GeneralThe audio system can be equipped with differ-ent options and different versions. There arethree system versions:

• Performance

• High Performance

• Premium Sound

The system version is shown in the displaywhen the audio system is started.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolbysymbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories Licensing Corporation. DolbySurround Pro Logic II System is manufacturedunder license from Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Remote control key and key positionsThe audio system can be used without theremote control key in the ignition switch for15 minutes at a time.

NOTE

Remove the remote control key from theignition switch if the audio system is usedwhen the engine is switched off. This is toavoid discharging the battery unnecessar-ily.

If the audio system is active when the engine isswitched off then it is activated automaticallynext time the engine is started.

Overview

G02

1398

Input for external audio source (AUX, USB/iPod*)


Centre console control panel

Control panel with headphones socket*


G02

1399

Confirm selection in menu system, acceptphone call.

Lead up in menu system. Interrupt currentfunction, end/refuse phone calls, clearentered characters.

Volume

A short press scrolls between CD tracks orpreset radio stations. A long press fast-winds CD tracks or searches radio stationsautomatically.



Audio system

04

136

Rear control panel with headphonessocketHeadphones with an impedance of16-32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higherare recommended for best sound reproduc-tion.

G02

1400

Volume

Scroll/search forward and backward

Audio source, activating

Headphones sockets (3.5 mm)

Activating/deactivatingThe control panel is activated with MODEwhen the audio system is active. Deactivation

is automatic when the audio system is deacti-vated or with a long press on MODE.

Scroll/search forward and backwardShort presses on are used to scroll betweenCD tracks or preset radio stations. Longpresses are used to fast-wind CD tracks or tosearch for radio stations automatically.

Limitations• The audio source (FM, AM, CD etc.) played

back in the speakers cannot be controlledfrom the rear control panel.

Menus and MY KEY 1

Some functions are controlled from the menusystem in the centre console. For more infor-mation on menus, see page 118. For informa-tion on the audio system's functions togetherwith BluetoothTM handsfree or phone, seepage 194.

Store favourite functions with MY KEY

G01

7752

1. Select the function to be stored in themenu. Only a selection of the functions canbe stored.

2. Hold MY KEY depressed for more than2 seconds.

The following functions can be storedwith MY KEY:CD/CD changer

• Random (CD changer)

• News

• TP

• Track information

1 The MY KEY function is not available if the car is equipped with built-in phone as an option.



Audio system

04

137

FM

• News

• TP

• Radio text

• Search PTY

• Show PTY text

AUDIO SETTINGS

• Sound setting

• Auto. volume control

Activate the stored function with a short presson MY KEY.

Audio functions

G02

1402

Centre console, controls for audio functions.

Internal audio sources: AM, FM and CD

External audio source. For connection, seepage 135

Push button and knob controls for adjust-ing the sound pattern

Navigation button

Volume and on/off

Audio volume and automatic volumecontrolThe audio system compensates for disruptingnoises in the passenger compartment byincreasing the volume with the speed of thecar. The level of compensation can be set at

low, medium or high. Select the level underAudio settings Auto. volume control.

External audio source audio volumeThe AUX input can be used for connecting anMP3 player for example, see page 135.

NOTE

The audio quality may be impaired if theplayer is charged while the audio system isin AUX mode. In which case, avoid chargingthe player via the 12 V socket.

Sometimes the AUX external audio source canbe heard at a different volume to the internalaudio sources. If the audio volume of the exter-nal audio source is too high then the soundquality can be impaired. Prevent this by adjust-ing the input volume of the AUX input:

1. Set the audio system in AUX mode usingMODE and navigate with to AUX inputvolume.

2. Turn the control or press / thenavigation button.

Audio controlsPress the control repeatedly to browseamong the following listed options.

Adjustment is made by turning the control.



Audio system

04


NOTE

Press MENU to access the audio settings.For more information, see page 118.

• Bass - Bass level.

• Treble - Treble level.

• Fader – Balance between the front andrear speakers.

• Balance – Balance between the left andright-hand speakers.

• Subwoofer* - Bass speaker level. Turningthe control anticlockwise to MIN deac-tivates the Subwoofer. The Subwoofer islocated as illustrated below.

G01

9419

• Surround* - Surround settings.

Under Surround 3 channel stereo or DolbySurround Pro Logic II can be activated byselecting 3-ch or Dpl2 respectively. This ena-bles the following options:

• Centre level* - Level for centre speaker.

• Surround level* - Level for surround.

EqualizerThe equalizer 2 can be used to adjust differentfrequency bands separately.

1. Go to Audio settings and selectEqualizer front or Equalizer rear.

The sound level for the wavelength isadjusted with / on the navigation but-ton. Press / to select another wave-length.

2. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.

Sound stageThe sound experience can be optimised for thedriver's seat*, both front seats or the rear seat.Select one of the options underAudio settings Sound stage.

Optimum sound reproductionThe audio system is calibrated for optimumsound reproduction by means of digital signalprocessing.

This calibration takes into account loudspeak-ers, amplifiers, passenger compartmentacoustics, listener position etc. for each com-bination of car model and audio system.

There is a also a dynamic calibration that takesinto account the position of the volume control,radio reception and vehicle speed.

The controls explained in these operatinginstructions, e.g. Bass, Treble andEqualizer, are only intended for the user to beable to adapt the sound reproduction accord-ing to personal taste.

2 Certain audio levels



Audio system

04


CD functions

G02

1403

Centre console, controls for CD functions.

CD eject

CD insert and eject slot

Navigation button for changing CD tracks

Fast-wind and change CD track

CD changer position selection*

Scan CD

Start playback (CD player)If a music CD is in the player when CD ispressed then playback is started automatically.Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD.

Start playback (CD changer)If a CD position with a music CD is alreadyselected when CD is pressed then playbackstarts automatically. Otherwise, select a discwith the number buttons 1–6 or / on thenavigation button.

Insert a CD (CD changer)1. Select an empty position with the number

buttons 1–6 or / on the navigationbutton.

An empty position is marked on the dis-play. The text Insert Disc shows that anew disc can be inserted. The CD changercan hold up to six CDs.

2. Insert a CD in the CD changer slot.

Disc ejectA CD will stay in the ejected position forapprox. 12seconds. Following which it is re-inserted in the player and playback continues.

Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but-ton.

Eject all discs with a long press on the ejectbutton. The entire magazine is emptied disc bydisc.

PauseIf the volume is turned down completely, theCD player is stopped. The player is restartedwhen volume is increased.

Audio files 3

The CD player also supports MP3 and WMAformat audio files.

NOTE

Some copy protected audio files may not beread by the player.

When a CD containing audio files is insertedinto the player the disc's directory structure isread in. It may take a while before playbackstarts depending on the quality of the disc.

Navigation and playbackIf a disc containing audio files is inside the CDplayer then ENTER leads to the disc's direc-tory structure. The directory structure is navi-gated in the same way as the audio system'smenu structure. Audio files have the symbol

and directories have the symbol .Start audio file playback with ENTER.

When the playback of a file is finished the play-back of the other files in the same directorycontinues. Directory change takes place auto-

3 High Performance and Premium Sound



Audio system

04

140

matically when all files in the current directoryhave been played back.

Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audiofilesShort presses / on the navigation buttonare used to scroll between CD tracks/audiofiles. Long presses are used to fast-wind CDtracks/audio files. The steering wheel keypadcan also be used for this purpose. Trackchange can also be made by turningTUNING.

Scan CDThis function plays the first ten seconds ofeach CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to acti-vate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continueplayback of the current CD track/audio file.

RandomThis function plays the tracks in random order.The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol-led through in the normal way.

NOTE

It is only possible to scroll between randomCD tracks on the current disc.

Different messages appear depending onwhich random function has been selected:

• RANDOM means that the tracks from onlyone music CD are played

• RND ALL means that all tracks on allmusic CDs in the CD changer are played.

• RANDOM FOLDER means that the audiofiles in a directory on the current CD areplayed.

CD playerIf a normal music CD is being played, activate/deactivate under Random.

If a disc with audio files is being played, acti-vate/deactivate under Random Folder.

CD changerIf a normal music CD is being played underRandom Single disc or Random Alldiscs. The option All discs only applies to themusic CDs in the changer.

If a CD with audio files is being played, activate/deactivate instead under Random Folder.If you select another CD the function is deac-tivated.

Track informationIf track information is stored on a music CDthen it can be shown on the display. This alsoapplies to MP3 and WMA files for PremiumSound and High Performance. Activate/deac-tivate in CD mode under CD settings Trackinformation.

Radio functions

G02

1404

Centre console, controls for radio functions.

Navigation button for tuning, automatic

Cancel function in progress

Tuning, manual

Scan wavelength

Preset storage, automatic

Preset buttons and preset storage, manual

Select wavelength AM and FM (FM1 andFM2)

Tuning, automatic1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.

2. Press / on the navigation button.



Audio system

04

141

Tuning, manual1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.

2. Turn TUNING.

Preset10 station presets can be stored per wave-length. FM has 2 memories for presets: FM1and FM2. The stored presets are selectedusing the preset buttons.

Preset storage can be carried out manually orautomatically.

Preset storage, manual1. Tune into a station.

2. Hold in a station preset button until themessage Channel stored appears on thedisplay.

Preset storage, automaticThe function is especially useful in areas wherethe radio stations and their frequencies areunfamiliar. The 10 strongest radio stations arestored automatically in a separate memory.

1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.

2. Hold in AUTO until Autostoring.. appearson the display.

Once Autostoring.. disappears from the dis-play, the stations are stored. The radio contin-ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on thedisplay. The automatically stored presets can

now be selected using the preset buttons.Automatic preset storage can be cancelledusing EXIT.

Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for exam-ple AUTO or FM.

Returning to Auto mode provides access to theautostored presets:

1. Press AUTO.> Auto appears on the display.

2. Press a preset button.

Scan wavelengthThe function automatically searches the cur-rent wavelength for strong stations. When astation is found, it is played for approx. 8 sec-onds before scanning is resumed.

1. Select wavelength using AM or FM.

2. Press SCAN.

SCAN appears on the display. Close usingSCAN or EXIT.

RDS functionsRDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmittersinto a network. An FM transmitter in such anetwork sends information that gives an RDSradio the following functions:

• Automatically switches to a stronger trans-mitter if reception in the area is poor.

• Searches for programme type, such astraffic information or news.

• Receives text information on current radioprogramme.

NOTE

Some radio stations do not use RDS or onlysome if its functionality.

If a required programme type is located theradio can switch stations interrupting the audiosource currently in use. For example, if the CDplayer is in use, it is paused. The interruptingtransmission is played at a preset volume, seepage 143. The radio returns to the previousaudio source and volume when the set pro-gramme type is no longer broadcast.

The programme functions alarm (ALARM), traf-fic information (TP), news (NEWS), and pro-gramme types(PTY) interrupt one another inorder of priority, where alarm has the highestpriority and programme types has the lowest.For further programme interruption settings(EON and REG), see page 143. Press EXIT toreturn to the interrupted audio source.

AlarmThis function is used to warn of serious acci-dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be



Audio system

04

142

temporarily interrupted or deactivated. Themessage ALARM! appears on the displaywhen an alarm message is transmitted.

Traffic information – TPThis function allows traffic information sentwithin a set station's RDS network to breakthrough. The TP symbol indicates that thefunction is activated. If the set station can sendtraffic information then appears on thedisplay.

Activate/deactivate under FM settingsTP.

TP from current station/all stationsThe radio can interrupt with traffic informationfrom only the set (current) station or from allstations.

Go to FM settings Advanced radiosettings TP TP Station to change.

NewsThis function allows news broadcasts sentwithin a set station's RDS network to breakthrough. The NEWS symbol indicates that thefunction is active.

Activate/deactivate under FM settingsNews.

News from current/all stationsThe radio can interrupt with news from only theset (current) station or from all stations.

Go to FM settings Advanced radiosettings News station to change.

Programme types – PTYThe PTY function can be used to select differ-ent programme types, such as pop music andserious classic. The PTY symbol indicates thatthe function is active. This function allows pro-gramme types broadcast within a set station'sRDS network to break through.

1. Activate in FM mode by selecting a pro-gramme type under FM settings PTY

Select PTY.

2. Deactivate by clearing the PTYs under FMsettings Clear all PTY.

PTY searchThis function searches the entire wavelengthfor the selected programme type.

1. Select a PTY under FM settings PTYSelect PTY.

2. Go to FM settings PTY SearchPTY.

If the radio finds any of the selected pro-gramme types, >| To seek appears on thedisplay.

To continue searching for another broad-cast of the selected programme types,press on the navigation button.

Display of programme typeThe programme type of the current station canbe shown on the display.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FMsettings PTY Show PTY

NOTE

Not all radio stations support display of pro-gramme type.

Radio textSome RDS stations transmit information onprogramme content, artists, etc. This informa-tion can be shown on the display.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode underRadio text.

Automatic frequency update – AFThis function selects one of the strongesttransmitters for a set station. The function mayneed to search through the entire FM wave-length to find a strong transmitter. If this



Audio system

04


occurs, the radio mutes and PI Seek PressExit to cancel appears on the display.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FMsettings Advanced radio settingsAF.

Regional radio programmes – REGThis function causes the radio to continue witha regional transmitter even if its signal strengthis low. The symbol REG shows that the func-tion is active.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FMsettings Advanced radio settingsRegional.

Enhanced Other Networks – EONThis function is useful in urban areas with manyregional radio stations. It allows the distancebetween the car and the radio station trans-mitter to determine when programme functionsshould interrupt the current audio source.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode by select-ing one of the options under FM settings

Advanced radio settings EON:

• Local – interrupts only if the radio stationtransmitter is close.

• Distant 4 – interrupts if the station trans-mitter is far away, even if there is a lot ofstatic.

• Off – no interruption for programmes fromother transmitters.

Resetting RDS functionsAll radio settings can be reset to the originalfactory settings.

The reset is carried out in FM mode underFM settings Advanced radio settings

Reset all.

Volume control, programme typesThe interrupting programme types, e.g. NEWSor TP, are heard at the volume selected foreach respective programme type. If the volumelevel is adjusted during the programme inter-ruption, the new level is saved until the nextprogramme interruption.

Radio system - DAB*

GeneralDAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digitalbroadcasting system for radio.

Service and Ensemble• Service - Channel, radio channel (only

audio services are supported by the sys-tem).

• Ensemble - A collection of radio channelson the same frequency.

Programming of channel groups(Ensemble learn)When the vehicle is moved to a new broad-casting area, programming of existing channelgroups in the area can take place.

Programming of channel groups creates anupdated list of all available channel groups.The list is not updated automatically. Program-ming takes place via the Ensemble learnmenu or directly by means of a long press onAUTO. If can take up to a minute to program achannel group if both Band III and LBand areselected.

WavelengthDAB is transmitted on two wavelengths: BandIII and LBand.

4 Default/factory settings.



Audio system

04

144

• Band III - over the whole country

• LBand - mainly in large cities

By selecting for example Band III on its own,channel programming takes place morequickly than if both Band III and LBand areselected. It is not certain that all channelgroups will be found. Wavelength selectiondoes not affect the stored memories.

Navigation via listsThere are three types of basic list which can beused for navigation:

• Ensemble list - Shows channel groupsthat the receiver has obtained via channelgroup programming.

• Service list - Shows channels irrespectiveof the channel group to which they are allo-cated. The list can also be filtered usingDAB-PTY (see below).

• Subchannel list - Subchannels to aselected channel.

The lists can be accessed via the menu. Thechannel groups can also be accessed bypressing ENTER.

Scanning (SCAN)Scanning means that all channels in the list areplayed for 10 seconds each.

Press SCAN to activate

Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTYmode. In which case only the preset type ofchannels is played.

Stop scanning by pressing SCAN once, orby pressing EXIT.

SubchannelSecondary components are usually namedsubchannels. These are temporary and cancontain e.g. translations of the main pro-gramme into other languages.

If one or more subchannels are broadcast thenthe > symbol is shown to the right of the chan-nel name in the display. A subchannel is shownby means of the > symbol appearing to the leftof the channel name in the display.

To access a subchannel:

Press

To navigate between subchannels:

Press or

Subchannels can only be accessed on theselected main channel and not on any otherone without selecting it.

DAB PTY (program type)DAB PTY selects one type of radio pro-gramme. There are 29 different programmetypes which also include different programme

categories. After selecting a programme type,navigation only takes place within the channelsbroadcasting that type.

Exit this mode as follows:

Press EXIT

It is also possible to select a preset channel orexit DAB-PTY via the menu. In certain casesDAB radio will exit PTY mode when DAB toDAB linking (see below) is implemented.

DAB to DAB linkIt is possible to exit a channel with poor or noreception to the same channel in another chan-nel group with better reception. There may bea certain delay when changing channel group.There may be a short silence between theavailability of the current channel finishing tothe availability of the new channel starting.

DAB display settings1. Basic - Only the channel name is shown if

a primary component is being played. Asubchannel name is shown if it is a sub-channel being played

2. Ensemble mode - Adds the channelgroup name to the channel name

3. Ensemble + PTY - Adds the programmetype name under the channel name



Audio system

04

145

PresetsA preset contains one channel but no sub-channel. If a subchannel is being played and apreset is saved then only the channel ID is reg-istered. This is because subchannels are tem-porary. At the next attempt to retrieve thepreset, the channel which contained the sub-channel will be played. The preset is notdependent on the channel list.

A channel stored as a preset does not need tobe in the channel list to be loaded. If it is loadedwithout the channel being available then a pre-set number is shown and there is silence untilan available preset is selected for loading.Alternatively another channel.

NOTE

The audio system's DAB system does notsupport all functions available in the DABstandard.

Menu structureMain menu DAB

1. Select Ensemble

2. Select channel (Service)

3. Select Subchannel

4. DAB PTY

4.1. DAB PTY off

4.2. News

4.3. Current affairs

4.4. Information

4.5. Sport

4.6. Education

4.7. Drama

4.8. Art

4.9. Science

4.10. Conversation

4.11. Pop music

4.12 Rock music

4.13. Calm music

4.14. Light classic

4.15. Serious classic

4.16. Other music

4.17. Weather & metro

4.18. Finance

4.19 Children

4.20. Factual

4.21. Religion

4.22. Phone in

4.23. Travel & touring

4.24. Leisure & hobby

4.25. Jazz and blues

4.26. Country music

4.27. National music

4.28. Oldies music

4.29. Folk music

4.30. Documentary

5. Ensemble learn

6. DAB settings

6.1. DAB display settings

6.1.1. Ensemble name

6.1.2. Ensemble name andPTY

6.1.3. Basic

6.2. DAB to DAB link

6.3. FM traffic

6.4. Select DAB band

6.4.1. Band III

6.4.2. LBand

6.4.3. LBand & Band III



Audio system

04

146

6.5. Reset DAB



RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*

04


GeneralThe RSE system can be used at the same timeas the car's infotainment system.

When the rear seat passengers are using DVD,RSE-AUX or watching TV 1 while listening withheadphones, the driver and front seat passen-ger can still use the car's radio or CD player.

Power consumption, ignition positionsThe system can be activated in ignition positionI or II and while the engine is running. When thecar is being started the film stops temporarilyand continues when the engine has started.

When the system has been used once withoutthe ignition in position I it is blocked. To restart,ignition position I must be activated.

NOTE

In the event of extended use (more than 10minutes) with the engine switched off - thecapacity of the car's battery may decreaseto such a low level that the engine cannotbe started.

In which case a message will appear on thescreen.

TV overview

Press and select TV I DVD I AUXTV MEDIA MENU.

Channel list

Channel manage-ment

Channel search Management ofnew carriers

Add carrier

Information on fre-quency

Delete a frequency

Delete all frequen-cies

Auto scan

System settings TV

Audio mode

Factory default

Time zone setting

CI module No CAM inserted

CI module infor-mation

Signal strength

System settings TVPress MEDIA MENU System settingsTV.

Languages

TV menu language

E.g. English

Pict. format 16:9

4:3

Auto

1 TV is an option for the RSE system.




04


Mode (screenmode)

Standard

Zoom

Full screen

Centered

Audio mode Right

Left

Banner timeout

The menus can bedisplayed forbetween8-40 seconds.

System settings-Sound modePress MEDIA MENU System settingsAudio mode.

The original speech for a TV programme canbe replaced with speech in another language ifthe programme is broadcast with several audiotracks.

Audio Volume - 1, e.g.ENG.

Volume - 2, e.g.GER.

Audio mode Right

Left

Stereo

AC3

System settings-Factory settingsPress MEDIA MENU System settingsFactory default.

The system's factory settings are restoredhere.

System settings-Time zone settingsPress MEDIA MENU System settingsTime zone setting.

For local programme times to be displayedcorrectly the time zone must be set. TheGUIDE and INFO button menus and the clockare affected by local time zones.

Pay channelsTo watch pay channels a payment card mustbe fitted in an adapter which is inserted into thedigital TV box.

G03

1510

The box is located under the hatch in the cargoarea

1. Open the hatch in the cargo area, the boxis protected by a cover.

2. Open the rubber cover on the box.

3. Fit the payment card into the adapter.Make sure that it is fitted correctly.

4. Insert the adapter in the digital TV box.Make sure that it is inserted correctly.> The system will detect that it has

received new information.

5. Search to find the new channels that havebecome available, see the section "Pay-ment card TV channels" below.




04


Payment card TV channelsSearch so that the system identifies the pay-ment card's channels.

1. Press MEDIA MENU on the remote con-trol.

2. Select Channel search Auto scan.

3.Select country and press .

Formats supported by the digital TV boxThe TV system supports MPEG-2 transmis-sions. There is the option to receiveMPEG-4 transmissions if you buy an adapter.This adapter is inserted into the digital TV boxand is fitted in the same way as the adapter forthe payment card. See the section "Pay chan-nels" above.

Music

Playing back a CD disc1. Insert the CD with the label side turned

from the buttons.> The disc starts to play back automati-

cally.

2. Switch on the wireless headphones, selectCH A for left-hand screen or CH B for right-hand screen.

> The sound is directed to the head-phones.

3. Adjust the audio volume in the headphonesusing the volume control/wheel on theheadphones.

Alternatively - activate the car's audio sys-

tem in MODE-AUX and press A B onthe remote control to listen via the speak-ers.

Selecting within a disc directory1. Load the disc.

2.Press .

3. Scroll using the navigation buttons toselect a file.

4.Press to select the subdirectory.

Different playback optionsThe disc can be played back in different ways,scroll with the navigation buttons to selectplayback option.

When the dialogue box appears:

1. Press the right-hand navigation button tomove over in the right-hand menu.

2. Scroll using the navigation buttons toselect playback options.

3.Confirm with .

Change CD track

Change CD track with orfast-wind by holding the buttonsdepressed.

Pause1.

Pause and restart the disc with .

2.Stop the disc with .

3.Press again to eject the disc.

Discs copied privately can be used.However, playback and quality depend on thequality of the source file, format and disc qual-ity.

AUX input, Electrical socket 12 VThe input allows you to connect other equip-ment. Always follow the instructions includedwith the external equipment, or from the man-ufacturer or reseller, when connecting. Equip-ment connected via the RSE AUX input can usethe screens, wireless headphones, head-phones sockets and the car's speakers.




04


Connecting the RSE AUX input

G03

0382

The RSE-AUX input is located under the front arm-rest.

1. Connect the video cable to the yellowsocket.

2. Connect the left-hand audio cable to thewhite socket and the right-hand one to thered socket.

3. Connect the power cable to the powersocket if your equipment is designed for12 V.

SystemFormats supported by the system.

Audioformat

CD-DA, DVD Audio Playback,MP3, WMA

Videoformat

DVD video, VCD, SVCD, DivX/MPEG-4, WMA video, Photo CDKodak, Photo CD JPG

Discformat

DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, DVD-RW,DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, CD-R,CD-ROM, CD-RW, CD-3, HDCD

Advanced system settingsThese settings can only be accessed when theDVD player is empty.

Press MEDIA MENU.

GENERAL SETUP ANGLE MARK

CAPTION

AUDIO SETUP COMPRESSION

DVX(R)REGISTRATION

PREFERENCES TV TYPE

AUDIO

SUBTITLE

DEFAULTS

Changing the battery in the remotecontrol and wireless headphonesThe remote control and headphones are pow-ered by 2 AAA batteries.

Take along extra batteries for a long journey.

G03

1361

1. Unscrew the screw and detach the batterycover.

2. Remove the used batteries, turn the newbatteries in accordance with the symbolsin the battery compartment and insertthem.

3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.


For electrical socket location, see page 187.



04


G03

1358

1. Unscrew the screw and detach the batterycover.

2. Remove the used batteries, turn the newbatteries in accordance with the symbolsin the battery compartment and insertthem.

3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.

NOTE

If the system is too hot to be used or if bat-tery voltage is too low then an informationmessage appears on the screen.

Environmental careBe sure to dispose of the exhausted batteriesin an environmentally responsible manner.



Trip computer

04


General

G02

1364

Information display and controls.

READ - confirms

Thumbwheel – browse between menusand options in the trip computer list

RESET – resets

To scroll through trip computer information,turn the thumbwheel up or down in steps. Con-tinue turning to return to the starting point.

Functions

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you areusing the trip computer, this message mustbe acknowledged in order to revert to thetrip computer function. Acknowledge bypressing READ.

To change unit specified for distance andspeed, contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Current speed*The instrument panel display shows currentspeed in mph if the speedometer is graduatedin km/h. If the speedometer is graduated inmph then the current speed is shown in km/h.

Average speedThe car calculates the average speed from thelast resetting. Reset using RESET.

InstantaneousCurrent fuel consumption is calculated everysecond. The information on the display isupdated every couple of seconds. When thecar is stationary, " ----" appears on the display.

AverageThe average fuel consumption since the lastreset. Reset using RESET.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading ifa fuel-driven additional 1, and/or parkingheater* has been used.

Km to empty tankThe calculation is based on the average fuelconsumption over the last 30 km and theremaining driveable fuel quantity. The displayshows the approximate distance that can bedriven with the fuel quantity remaining in thetank. No guaranteed range remains when thedisplay shows " --- km to empty tank". Refuelas soon as possible.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading ifa fuel-driven parking heater* has been usedor if driving style has been changed.

Resetting1. Select Average speed or Average.

2. Press and hold RESET forapprox. 1 second to reset the selected

1 Diesel cars only.



Trip computer

04

153

function. If RESET is kept depressed for atleast 3 three seconds then Average speedand Average are reset simultaneously.



Compass*

04


Operation

G02

9737

Rearview mirror with compass.

The bottom centre of the rearview mirror hasan integrated display that shows the compassdirection in which the front of the car is point-ing. Eight different directions are shown withEnglish abbreviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

The compass is activated automatically whenthe car is started or in key position II, seepage 71. To deactivate/activate the compass -press in the button on the rear side of the mirrorusing a paper clip for example.

CalibrationThe compass may need calibrating to workcorrectly. C is shown in the mirror's display ifthe compass needs calibrating.

1. Stop the car in a large open area free fromsteel structures and high-voltage powerlines.

2. Start the car.

NOTE

For optimum calibration - switch off all elec-trical equipment (climate control system,wipers etc.) and make sure that all doors areclosed.

3. Press and hold the button on the rear of therearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar)until C is shown again (approx. 6 seconds).

4. Drive off as usual. C disappears from thedisplay when calibration is complete.

Alternative calibration method: Driveslowly in a circle at a speed of no more than8 km/h until C disappears from the displaywhen calibration is complete.

Selecting the zone

G03

0295

Magnetic zones.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.The correct zone must be selected for the com-pass to work correctly.

1. The remote control key should be in posi-tion II, see page 71.

2. Press and hold the button on the rear of therearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar)for at least 3 seconds. The number for thecurrent area is shown.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the num-ber for the required geographic area ( 1–15) is shown.

4. The display will revert to showing the com-pass direction after a few seconds.



DSTC – Stability and traction control system

04

155

General information on DSTCThe stability and traction control system, DSTC(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helpsthe driver to avoid skidding and improves thecar's traction.

The system limits the driving and brake forceof the wheels individually so that skidding canbe avoided. This increases manoeuvrabilityand as a result safety in the event of suddenmovement.

Traction is improved by means of the systemdistributing the driving force between thewheels. The system primarily engages at lowspeed on poor road surfaces.

The activation of the system during brakingmay be noticed as a throbbing sound. The carmay accelerate slower than expected when theaccelerator pedal is depressed.

Messages in the information display

DSTC Temporarily OFFSystem temporarily reduced due to excessivebrake disc temperature. The function is reacti-vated automatically when the brakes havecooled.

DSTC Service requiredSystem disabled due to a fault.

Stop the car in a safe place and turn off theengine. If the message remains when the

engine is restarted, drive to an authorisedVolvo workshop.

Symbols in the combined instrumentpanelIf the symbols and are displayedat the same time, read the message on theinformation display.

If the symbol appears alone then it mayappear as follows:

• Flashing light means that the system isnow being activated.

• Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys-tem check when the engine is started.

• Constant glow after starting the engine orwhile driving means system fault.

Reduced operationSystem operation during skidding and accel-eration can be reduced. Operation during skid-ding is delayed and so allows more skiddingwhich provides greater freedom for dynamicdriving. Traction in deep snow or sand isimproved as traction is no longer limited.

Operation

G02

1409

1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTCmenu is shown. DSTC ON means that thesystem function is unchanged.

DSTC spin control OFF means that sys-tem operation is reduced.

2. Press and hold RESET until the DSTCmenu is changed.

The system remains reduced until the engine isnext started.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics may dete-riorate if the function is reduced.



Adapting driving characteristics

04


Active chassis (Four C)*Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Con-trolled Chassis Concept), regulates the cha-racteristics of the shock absorbers so that thecar's driving characteristics can be adjusted.There are three settings: Comfort, Sport andAdvanced.

ComfortThis setting means that the car is perceived asbeing more comfortable and is recommendedfor longer journeys. Shock absorption is softand the movement of the body is smooth andgentle.

SportThis setting means that the car is perceived asbeing more sporty and is recommended formore active driving. Steering response is fasterthan in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption isharder and the body follows the road in orderto reduce rolling during fast cornering.

AdvancedThis setting is only recommended on very evenand smooth road surfaces.

The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi-mum roadholding and rolling in bends is furtherminimised.

Operation

G02

1410

Chassis settings.

Use the buttons in the centre console tochange setting. The setting in use when theengine is switched off is activated next time theengine is started.

Speed related steering force*Steering force increases with the speed of thecar to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. Atlow speed the car is easy to steer in order tofacilitate parking for example.

Steering force can be changed under Carsettings Steering force level For adescription of the menu system, seepage 118

This menu cannot be accessed while the car isin motion.



Cruise control*

04


Operation

G02

1411

Display and controls.

Standby mode

Resume set speed

Deactivating

Activate/set speed

Set speed (in brackets = standby mode)

Activating and setting the speedIn order to enable the activation of cruise con-trol, it must first be engaged in standby modewith the CRUISE button . The symbolilluminates in the display and the text (---) km/h shows that cruise control is in standbymode.

Cruise control is then activated with orafter which the current speed is stored and isused as the set speed. The display text (---)km/h changes to show the set speed, e.g.100 km/h.,

NOTE

Cruise control cannot be engaged atspeeds below 30 km/h.

Adjusting the set speedIn active mode the speed is adjusted with longor short presses on or .

A temporary increase in speed using the accel-erator, such as while overtaking, does notaffect the cruise control setting. When theaccelerator is released the car will return to theset speed.

NOTE

If one of the cruise control buttons is keptdepressed for more than approx. oneminute then cruise control is disengaged.The engine must then be switched off inorder to then reset cruise control.

DeactivationCruise control is disengaged with CRUISE orby switching off the engine. The set speed iscleared.

Temporary deactivationPress On to disengage cruise control tem-porarily. The saved speed is shown in bracketsin the display, e.g. (100) km/h.

Automatic temporary deactivationCruise control is deactivated spontaneouslywhen the driving wheels spin or if the car'sspeed falls below approx. ca 30 km/h. Cruisecontrol is also deactivated when the brakes areused, when the gear selector is moved to neu-tral position or if the accelerator pedal isdepressed for a longer time (approx. 60 sec-onds). Cruise control then changes over tostandby mode and the set speed is saved.

Resume set speedIf cruise control has been deactivated tempo-rarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . Thespeed is then set to the previously set speed.

NOTE

A significant increase in speed may ariseafter the speed has been resumed with .



Adaptive cruise control*

04


GeneralAdaptive Cruise Control – (ACC) is designed toassist the driver with support on long straightroads in steady traffic, for example on motor-ways and main roads.

WARNING

You must always pay attention to the trafficconditions and intervene when adaptivecruise control is not maintaining a suitablespeed or suitable distance.

Adaptive cruise control cannot cover alldriving situations and traffic, weather androad conditions.

The Function section and after informsabout limitations that the driver must beaware of before using the adaptive cruisecontrol.

When driving you are responsible for main-taining the correct distance and speed,even when adaptive cruise control is used.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of adaptive cruise controlcomponents must only be performed by anauthorised Volvo workshop.

Function

G02

1412

Functions overview.

Warning lamp, braking by driver required

Controls

Radar sensor

Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruisecontrol system and a coordinated spacing sys-tem.

WARNING

Adaptive cruise control is not a collisionavoidance system. The driver must inter-vene if the system does not detect a vehiclein front.

Adaptive cruise control does not brake forpeople or animals. Nor for oncoming, slowor stationary vehicles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control, forexample, in city traffic, in dense traffic, atjunctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot ofwater or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads oron slip roads.

The distance to the vehicle ahead is measuredby a radar sensor. The speed is regulated byacceleration and braking. It is normal for thebrakes to emit a low sound when they are beingused by cruise control.

WARNING

The brake pedal moves when the cruisecontrol brakes. Do not rest your foot underthe brake pedal as it could become trapped.

The cruise control objective is to follow thevehicle ahead but in the same lane and at a settime interval. If the radar sensor has notdetected a vehicle ahead then the only objec-




04


tive is the set speed. This is also the case if thespeed of the vehicle ahead exceeds the cruisecontrol set speed.

The adaptive cruise control aims to control thespeed in a smooth way. In situations thatdemand sudden braking you must brake your-self. This applies with large differences inspeed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily.Due to limitations in the radar sensor, brakingmay come unexpectedly or not at all, seepage 161.

Adaptive cruise control can only be activatedabove 30 km/h. If speed falls below 30 km/h orif engine speed becomes too slow, then theadaptive cruise control disengages and stopsbraking. In which case the driver must imme-diately take over and maintain the distance tovehicles in front. The highest speed setting is200 km/h.

Warning lamp, braking by driver requiredAdaptive cruise control has a braking capacitythat is equivalent to approximately 30% of thecar's braking capacity.

If the car needs to brake more heavily thancruise control capacity and the driver does notbrake, then the cruise control uses the collisionwarning system's warning lamp and warningsound to alert the driver that immediate inter-vention is required.

NOTE

The warning lamp may be difficult to noticein strong sunlight or when sunglasses arebeing worn.

WARNING

Cruise control only warns of vehiclesdetected by the radar sensor. Consequentlythere may be no warning or it may be sub-ject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning butbrake when it is necessary.

Operation

G01

7350

Display and controls.

Activate and resume settings, increasespeed

Standby mode, on/off

Set time interval

Activating and setting the speed

Set speed (in brackets = standby mode)

Set time interval during adjustment

Set time interval after adjustment

Activating and setting the speedIn order to enable the activation of cruise con-trol, it must first be engaged in standby modewith the button . The symbol illuminatesin the display and the characters (---) showthat cruise control is in standby mode.

Cruise control is then activated with or ,after which the current speed is stored and isused as the set speed. The display characters(---) change to show the set speed, e.g. 100.

The car symbol is illuminatedon the left-hand side of thedisplay when the radar sensorhas detected another vehicle.The distance to vehicles infront is only regulated whenthe symbol is illuminated.

NOTE

Cruise control cannot be engaged atspeeds below 30 km/h.




04


Adjusting the set speedIn active mode the speed is adjusted with longor short presses on , or . In activemode the button has the same function as

but results in a lower increase in speed.

NOTE

If one of the cruise control buttons is keptdepressed for more than approx. oneminute then cruise control is disengaged.The engine must then be switched off inorder to then reset cruise control.

In some situations cruise control cannot beactivated. In which case Cruise controlUnavailable is shown in the display, seepage 162.

Set time intervalThe set time interval to vehicles in front isincreased with and decreased with .

Five different time intervalscan be chosen from andshown in the display as 1–5horizontal lines – the morelines there are the longer thetime interval, see page 164for table.

At low speed, when the distances are short, theadaptive cruise control increases the timeinterval slightly.

The adaptive cruise control allows the timeinterval to vary noticeably in certain situationsin order to allow the car to follow the vehicle infront smoothly and comfortably.

Note that a short time interval only allows thedriver a short reaction time if any unforeseentraffic problem should arise.

The number of lines for theselected time interval isshown during the setting itselfand for several seconds after-wards. Then a smaller scaleversion of the symbol isshown to the right of the dis-

play. The same symbol is also shown whenDistance Alert is activated, see page 164.

NOTE

Only use the time interval that is allowed inaccordance with local traffic regulations.

If cruise control does not seem to react toactivation the reason may be that the timeinterval to the closest vehicle prevents anincrease in speed.

The higher the speed, the longer the calcu-lated distance in metres for a specific timeinterval.

Deactivating and resuming settingsCruise control is deactivated, either with ashort press on , or by means of driver inter-vention, e.g. braking. The set speed is thenshown in brackets, e.g. ( 100). Speed and timeinterval are resumed with one press on .

For each additional press on , when cruisecontrol is activated, the set speed increases instages of 1 km/h.

NOTE

A significant increase in speed may ariseafter the speed has been resumed with .

A short press on in standby mode or a longpress in active mode deactivates cruise con-trol. The set speed is cleared and cannot beresumed.

Deactivation due to driver interventionCruise control is deactivated when the brakesare used, the gear selector is moved to neutralposition, or if the accelerator pedal isdepressed for a longer period. Cruise controlthen changes over to standby mode and thedriver must regulate vehicle speed manually.

If the accelerator pedal is kept depressed for ashorter period, for example during overtaking,cruise control is temporarily disengaged and




04


then re-engaged when the accelerator pedal isreleased.

Automatic deactivationAdaptive cruise control is dependent on othersystems e.g. stability and traction control sys-tem (DSTC). If any of these systems stop work-ing then cruise control is automatically deacti-vated.

In the event of automatic deactivation a signalwill sound and the message Cruise controlCancelled is shown in the display. The drivermust then intervene and adapt the speed tovehicles in front.

An automatic deactivation can be due to:

• speed falls below 30 km/h

• wheels lose traction

• brake temperature is high

• engine speed is too low

• the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wetsnow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).

The radar sensor and its limitationsApart from the adaptive cruise control, theradar sensor is also used by the CollisionWarning with Auto Brake function (seepage 167) and the Distance Alert function (seepage 164). It is designed to detect cars orlarger vehicles driving in the same direction.

Modification of the radar sensor could result init being illegal to use.

WARNING

Accessories or other objects such as auxil-iary lamps must not be installed in front ofthe grille.

The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi-cles in front is reduced significantly:

• if the radar sensor becomes blocked andcannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavyrain or slush, or if other objects have col-lected in front of the radar sensor.

NOTE

Keep the surface in front of the radar sensorclean.

• if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi-cantly different from your own speed.

The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. Insome situations it may detect another vehiclelater than expected or not detect any vehicle atall.

G02

1414

Radar sensor field of vision (grey).

Sometimes the radar sensor cannot detectvehicles at close quarters, for example avehicle that drives in between your car andvehicles in front.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, orvehicles not driving in the centre of the lanecan remain undetected.




04


In bends the radar sensor may detect thewrong vehicle or lose a detected vehiclefrom view.

Fault tracing and actionIf the display shows the message Radarblocked See manual this means that the

radar signals from the radar sensor are blockedand that vehicles in front of the car could notbe detected.

In turn this means that the Adaptive CruiseControl, Distance Alert and Collision Warning

with Auto Brake functions are not operatingeither.

The table presents possible causes for a mes-sage being shown along with the appropriateaction.

Cause Action

The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.

Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain orsnowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig-nals.

No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowyroad surface.

The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is nolonger blocked.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Specification

Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle.

Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed.

Set time interval, during adjustment.




04



Set time interval, after adjustment.

Turn on DSTC to enableCruise

Cruise control cannot be activated until the traction control and stability function (DSTC) has beenactivated.

Cruise control Cancelled The cruise control has been shut down.

The driver must regulate the speed.

Cruise control Unavailable Cruise control cannot be activated.

This could be due to:

• brake temperature is high

• the radar sensor is blocked e.g. by wet snow or rain.

Radar blocked See manual Cruise control temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slushhas collected in front of the radar sensor.

Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 161.

Cruise control Servicerequired

Cruise control not working.

Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.



Distance Alert

04

164

GeneralDistance Alert is a function that indicates thetime interval to vehicles in front.

The distance information is only provided forvehicles driving in front of the car and in thesame direction. No distance information is pro-vided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-cles.

G01

7362

A small section of the red warning lamp in thewindscreen illuminates with a constant glowwhen driving closer than the set time interval tovehicles in front.

NOTE

Distance Alert is deactivated during the timethat Adaptive Cruise Control is active.

Distance Alert is active at speeds above30 km/h.

WARNING

Distance Alert only shows the distance tovehicles in front – the speed of the car is notaffected.

Operation

G01

7371

Press the button in the centre console to switchthe function on or off. The function is switchedon if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

Set time intervalThe buttons for setting the time interval to vehi-cles in front are located to the left in the steer-ing wheel. Time intervals are increased using

and decreased using .

Five different time intervalscan be chosen from andshown in the display as 1–5horizontal lines – the morelines there are the longer thetime interval.

Number of lines Time interval(seconds)

1 1.0

2 1.4

3 1.8

4 2.2

5 2.6

The number of lines for theselected time interval isshown during the setting itselfand for several seconds after-wards. Then a smaller scaleversion of the symbol isshown to the right of the dis-

play. The same symbol is also shown whenadaptive cruise control is activated.



Distance Alert

04

165

NOTE

The higher the speed, the longer the calcu-lated distance in metres for a specific timeinterval.

The set time interval is also used by theadaptive cruise control function, seepage 159.

Only use the time interval that is allowed inaccordance with local traffic regulations.

LimitationsThe function uses the same radar sensor asadaptive cruise control and the collision warn-ing system. For more information on the radarsensor and its limitations, see page 161.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia-tions in light intensity, as well as wearingsunglasses, could mean that the warninglight in the windscreen cannot be seen.

Poor weather or winding roads could affect theradar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles infront. The size of other vehicles could alsoaffect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles.This could mean that the warning lamp illumi-nates at a shorter distance than the setting orthat the warning is temporarily absent. In whichcase, select a shorter time interval or switch offthe function temporarily.



Set time interval, during adjustment.

Set time interval, after adjustment.



Distance Alert

04

166


Radar blocked. See man-ual

Distance Alert temporarily disengaged.

has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 161

Collision warn. Servicerequired

Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.

Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.


.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush


Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

04


GeneralCollision Warning with Auto Brake is designedto assist the driver when there is a risk of col-liding with a vehicle in front that is stationary ordriving in the same direction.

The collision warning system has the followingthree functions.

1. Collision warningWarns the driver of a potentially imminent col-lision.

2. Brake supportAssists the driver to brake effectively in a criti-cal situation.

3. Auto BrakeBrakes the car automatically when a collisionis unavoidable. The Auto Brake function can-not prevent a collision but instead aims toreduce collision speed.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of collision warning systemcomponents must only be performed by anauthorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

The collision warning system does not workin all driving situations and traffic, weatherand road conditions. The collision warningsystem does not react to vehicles driving inanother direction to the car or to people andanimals.

Warning only activated in the event of a highrisk for collision. The Function section andthe section after advise about limitations ofwhich the driver should be aware beforeusing Collision Warning with Auto Brake.

The Auto Brake function can only reduce thecollision speed. The driver must depress thebrake pedal to achieve full brake function.

Never wait for a collision warning. Whendriving you are responsible for maintainingthe correct distance and speed, even whenthe collision warning system is used.

Function

G01

7382

Functions overview.

Visual warning signal in the event of a col-lision risk

Radar sensor

Camera sensor

Collision warningTogether with a camera sensor, the radar sen-sor detects stationary vehicles as well as vehi-cles driving in the same direction in front of thecar. In the event of there being a risk of collisionwith such a vehicle your attention is drawn witha red flashing warning lamp and a warningsound.

The collision warning system is active from andincluding 7 km/h.




04


Brake supportIf the risk of collision still increases after thecollision warning then the brake support is acti-vated. The brake support prepares the brakesystem for rapid braking and the brakes areapplied gently, which may be noticed as aslight jerk.

If the brake pedal is depressed sufficientlyquickly then full brake function is implemented,even with light pedal force.

Auto BrakeIf the driver has not yet started an evasivemanoeuvre in this situation and the risk of acollision is imminent then the Auto Brake func-tion comes into effect, without the driver need-ing to touch the brake pedal. Braking thentakes place with limited brake force in order toreduce collision speed. The driver has to brakein order to achieve full brake force.

OperationSettings are made from the centre console dis-play via a menu system. For information onhow the menu system is used, see page 118.

NOTE

The Auto Brake function is always switchedon and cannot be switched off.

On and OffTo select whether the collision warning systemshould be switched on or off: Under the Carsettings Collision warning settings menu,select between the options for On or Off. Thesetting selected when the engine was switchedoff is automatically obtained when the engineis started.

Activating/deactivating warning signalsThe warning sound and warning lamp are acti-vated automatically when the engine is startedif the system is switched on.

The warning sound can be activated/deacti-vated separately using the options for On orOff under Car settings Collision warningsettings Warning sound.

Set warning distanceThe warning distance regulates the distance atwhich the visual and acoustic warnings aredeployed. Select one of the options fromLong, Normal or Short under Car settings

Collision warning settings Warningdistance.

The warning distance determines the system'ssensitivity. Warning distance Long provides anearlier warning. First test with Long and if thissetting produces too many warnings, whichcould be perceived as irritating in certain sit-

uations, then change to warning distanceNormal.

Only use warning distance Short in excep-tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.

NOTE

When the adaptive cruise control is in usethe warning lamp and warning sound will beused by the cruise control even if the colli-sion warning system is switched off.

The collision warning system warns thedriver in the event of a risk of a collision, butthe function cannot shorten driver reactiontime.

In order for the collision warning system tobe effective, always drive with the DistanceAlert set at time interval 4 – 5. seepage 164.

NOTE

Even if the warning distance has been set toLong then in certain situations warningscould be perceived as being late. E.g. in theevent of large differences in speed or if vehi-cles in front brake heavily.

Checking settingsThe settings required can be controlled on thecentre console display. Access via the menu




04


for Car settings Collision warningsettings, see page 118.

LimitationsThe visual warning signal may be difficult tonotice in the event of strong sunlight, reflec-tions, when sunglasses are being worn or if thedriver is not looking straight ahead. The warn-ing sound should therefore always be acti-vated.

NOTE

The visual warning signal can be temporarilydisengaged in the event of high passengercompartment temperature caused bystrong sunlight for example. If this occursthen the warning sound is activated even ifit is deactivated in the menu system.

• Warnings may not appear if the dis-tance to the vehicle in front is small or ifsteering wheel and pedal movementsare large, e.g. a very active driving style.

WARNING

Warnings and braking action could beimplemented late or not at all if the trafficsituation or external influences mean thatthe radar or camera sensor cannot detect avehicle in front correctly.

The sensor system has a limited range forstationary or slow vehicles so the systemprovides less effective warnings or no warn-ings at all at a higher vehicle speed (above70 km/h) for such vehicles.

Warnings for stationary or slow vehiclescould be disengaged due to darkness.

The collision warning system uses the sameradar sensors as adaptive cruise control. Formore information on the radar sensor and itslimitations, see page 161.

An absent or late warning could mean thatthere is no brake support or it comes late.

If warnings are perceived as being too frequentor disturbing then the warning distance can bereduced. This would lead to the system warn-ing at a later stage, which reduces the totalnumber of warnings.

Camera sensor limitationsThe car's camera sensor is used by the threefunctions - Collision Warning with Auto Brake,

Driver Alert Control, see page 172 and LaneDeparture Warning, see page 175.

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of thecamera sensor clean from ice, snow, mistand dirt.

Do not attach or fit anything to the wind-screen in front of the camera sensor, as thiscould reduce or prevent the function of oneor more camera-dependent systems.

The camera sensors have limitations similar tothe human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in dark-ness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog forexample. Under such conditions the functionsof camera-dependent systems could be sig-nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.

Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car-riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirtyroad surfaces or unclear lane markings couldalso significantly reduce a camera sensor func-tion. Functions such as scanning the carriage-way and detecting other vehicles for example.

During very high temperatures the camera istemporarily switched off for about 15 minutesafter the engine is started in order to protectcamera functionality.




04


Fault tracing and actionIf the display shows the message WindscreenSensors blocked then this means that thecamera sensor is blocked and cannot detectvehicles or road markings in front of the car.

In turn this means that the Collision Warningwith Auto Brake, Lane Departure Warning andDriver Alert Control functions are not operatingwith full functionality.

The table presents possible causes for a mes-sage being shown along with the appropriateaction.

Cause Action

The windscreen sur-face in front of thecamera is dirty orcovered with ice orsnow.

Clean the wind-screen surface infront of the camerafrom dirt, ice andsnow.

Thick fog, heavy rainor snow means thatthe camera does notwork sufficientlywell.

No action. At timesthe camera does notwork during heavyrain or snowfall.

Cause Action

The windscreen sur-face in front of thecamera has beencleaned but themessage remains.

Wait. It may takeseveral minutes forthe camera to meas-ure the visibility.

Dirt has appearedbetween the insideof the windscreenand the camera.

Contact an author-ised Volvo work-shop to have thewindscreen insidethe camera covercleaned.



Collis'n warning OFF Collision warning system switched off.

Shown when the engine is started.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.

Collision warn. Unavailable The collision warning system cannot be activated.

Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.

Auto braking was acti-vated

Auto Brake has been active.




04



Windscreen Sensorsblocked

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.

Radar blocked. See man-ual

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slushhas collected in front of the radar sensor.

Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 161

Collision warn. Servicerequired

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.




Driver Alert System – DAC*

04


IntroductionThe Driver Alert System is intended to assistdrivers whose driving ability is deteriorating orwho are inadvertently leaving the lane they aredriving on.

The Driver Alert System consists of two differ-ent functions, which can either be switched onat the same time or individually:

• Driver Alert Control (DAC)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW), seepage 175.

A switched-on function is set in standby modeand is not activated automatically until speedexceeds 65 km/h.

The function is deactivated again when speeddecreases to below 60 km/h.

Both functions use a camera which is depend-ent on the lane having side markings paintedon each side.

WARNING

The Driver Alert System does not work in allsituations but is instead only intended to beof supplementary assistance.

The driver always has ultimate responsibilitythat the car is driven safely.

General information on Driver AlertControl - DAC

G01

7332

The function is intended to attract the driver'sattention when he/she starts to drive less con-sistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted orstarts to fall asleep.

A camera detects the side markings painted onthe carriageway and compares the section ofthe road with the driver's steering wheel move-ments. The driver is alerted if the vehicle doesnot follow the carriageway evenly.

NOTE

The camera sensor has certain limitations,see page 169.

The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete-riorating driving ability and it is primarilyintended for major roads. The function is notintended for city traffic.

In some cases driving ability is not affecteddespite driver fatigue. In which case there maynot be any warning issued for the driver. Forthis reason it is always important to stop andtake a break in the event of any signs of driverfatigue, irrespective of whether or not DACissues a warning.

NOTE

The function must not be used to extend adriving stint. Always plan breaks at regularintervals and ensure that you are fullyrested.

LimitationIn some cases the system may issue a warningdespite driving ability not deteriorating, forexample:

• if the driver tests the LDW function.

• in strong side winds.

• on rutted road surfaces.




04


OperationSome settings are made from the centre con-sole display and its menu system. For informa-tion on how the menu system is used, seepage 118.

The current status can be checked on the tripcomputer display with the left-hand stalkswitch.

G01

7329

Thumbwheel. Turn the rotary control untilthe display shows Driver Alert. The sec-ond row displays the Off, Unavailable orLevel mark options.

READ button. Confirms or clears a warningin the memory.

Activating Driver Alert ControlUsing the centre console display with its menusystem, locate Car settings Driver Alert.Select the On option.

The function is activated when speedexceeds 65 km/h and it remainsactive as long as the speed exceeds60 km/h. The display shows a level

mark with 1-5 bars, where a low number of barsindicates inconsistent driving ability. A highnumber of bars indicates stable driving.

If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then thedriver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well asthe text message Driver Alert Time for abreak. The warning is repeated after a time ifdriving ability does not improve.

WARNING

An alarm should be taken most seriously asa sleepy driver is not usually aware of his/her condition.

In the event of an alarm or signs of driverfatigue; stop the car in a safe manner assoon as possible and rest.

Studies have shown that it is equally as dan-gerous to drive when tired as it is under theinfluence of alcohol.



Driver Alert OFF Function not switched on.

Driver Alert Unavailable Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensoris temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.




04



Driver Alert The function analyses the driver's driving style.

The number of bars can vary in the range 1-5, where a low number of bars indicates inconsistentdriving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Driver Alert Time for abreak

The vehicle has been driven inconsistently; the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.






Driver Alert Sys Servicerequired

The system is disengaged.




Driver Alert System - LDW*

04


General information on Lane DepartureWarning - LDW

G01

7394

The function is intended to reduce the risk forsingle-vehicle accidents – accidents where, incertain situations, the vehicle leaves the car-riageway and is in danger of driving either intoa ditch or into oncoming traffic.

LDW consists of a camera that detects the sidemarkings painted on the carriageway. Thedriver is alerted by an acoustic signal if thevehicle crosses a side marking.

Operation and function

G01

7426

The function is switched on or off by means ofa switch on the centre console. An indicatorlamp in the button illuminates when the func-tion is switched on.

The trip computer display shows Lane DepartWarn Unavailable when the function is instandby mode.

The LDW function is activated automaticallyfrom standby mode after the camera has scan-ned in the carriageway's side markings andspeed exceeds 65 km/h. The trip computerdisplay then shows Lane Depart WarnAvailable.

If the camera can no longer detect the carria-geway's side markings or if speed decreasesto below 60 km/h then the function resumesstandby mode and the display shows LaneDepart Warn Unavailable.

If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand sidemarking of the carriageway without due causethen the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal.

No warning is given in the following situations:

• Direction indicators activated

• The driver has his/her foot on the brakepedal 1

• In the event of the accelerator pedal beingdepressed rapidly1

• In the event of rapid steering wheel move-ments1

• In the event of a sudden turn so that the carrolls.

The camera sensor also has certain limitations.For more information, see page 169.

NOTE

The driver is only warned once each time thewheels cross a line. So there is no acousticalarm when there is a line between the car'swheels.

1 A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected, see Personal preferences.




04




Lane departure warningOn/Off

The function is switched on/off.

Shown at switch-on/off.

The text disappears after 5 seconds.

Lane Depart Warn Availa-ble

The function scans the carriageway's side markings.

Lane Depart Warn Unavail-able

Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensoris temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.






Driver Alert Sys Servicerequired

The system is disengaged. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.




04


Personal preferencesSee the centre console display with its menusystem and there search for Car settingsLane departure warning. Select the optionrequired, see page 118.

On at start up: This option sets the function instandby mode each time the car is started.Otherwise the same value as when the enginewas switched off is obtained.

Increased sensitivity: This option increasessensitivity, an alarm is triggered earlier andfewer limitations apply.



Park Assist*

04


General 1

Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.An acoustic signal as well as symbols on theaudio system display indicate the distance tothe detected obstacle.

Parking assistance is available in two variants:

• Rear only

• Both front and rear.

WARNING

Parking assistance does not relinquish thedriver's own responsibility during parking.The sensors have blind spots where obsta-cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil-dren and animals near the car.

Function

G02

1417

The system is automatically engaged when thecar is started and the switch's On/Off lamp isilluminated. If parking assistance is switchedoff with the button, the lamp goes out.

The centre console display shows an overviewof the relationship between the car anddetected obstacle.

Marked fields show which of the four sensorsdetected an obstacle. The more marked fieldsin the same bar, the shorter the distancebetween the car and detected obstacle.

The frequency of the signal increases theshorter the distance to an obstacle, in front ofor behind the car. Other sound from the audiosystem is muted automatically.

Active

Active

Active

1

2

3

G02

5643

Display screens in different situations.

Display in car with only rear sensors.Obstacle detected by both right-hand sen-sors.

Display in car with both front and rear sen-sors. The front right-hand sensor is 30 cmor closer to a detected obstacle.

Display in car with both front and rear sen-sors. Reverse gear engaged, no front orrear obstacle detected.

When the distance is within 30 cm the tone isconstant and the marked sensors' bar is fullyfilled in, see figure (2). If the detected obstacleis within the distance for the constant tone bothbehind and in front of the car, then the tonesounds alternately from the loudspeakers.

1 Depending on the market, the Parking assistance system may be either Standard, Option or Accessory.



Park Assist*

04


Rear parking assistance

G01

7833

The distance covered to the rear of the car isabout 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal forobstacles behind comes from the rear loud-speakers.

Rear parking assistance is activated whenreverse gear is engaged.

The system must be deactivated when revers-ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbaror similar. Otherwise they would trigger thesensors.

NOTE

Rear parking assistance is deactivatedautomatically when towing a trailer if Volvogenuine trailer wiring is used.

Front parking assistance

G02

1424

The distance covered to the front of the car isabout 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal forobstacles in front comes from the front loud-speaker.

Front parking assistance is active at speeds upto 15 km/h, and also during reversing. The sys-tem is deactivated at a higher speed. However,the lamp in the button remains illuminated inorder to indicate that the system is activatedfor the next time the driver shall park. When thespeed is below 10 km/h the system is reacti-vated.

NOTE

Front parking assistance is deactivatedwhen the parking brake is applied.

IMPORTANT

When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember thatthey must not obscure the sensors – theauxiliary lamps could then be detected asobstacles.

Fault indicatorIf the information symbol illuminateswith constant glow and the informa-

tion display shows Park assist syst Servicerequired then parking assistance is disen-gaged.

IMPORTANT

In certain conditions the parking assistancesystem may produce incorrect warning sig-nals that are caused by external audiosources that emit the same ultrasonic fre-quencies that the system works with.

Examples of such sources include horns,wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes andexhaust noises from motorcycles etc.



Park Assist*

04


Cleaning the sensors

G01

8129

Sensor location, front.

G01

8067

Sensor location, rear.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly toensure that they work properly. Clean themwith water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors maycause incorrect warning signals.



BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System

04


General information on BLIS

G02

1426

BLIS camera

Indicator lamp

BLIS symbol

BLIS is an information system based on cam-era technology that under certain conditionscan help the driver to notice vehicles moving inthe same direction as the host vehicle in the so-called "blind spot".

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS system componentsmust only be performed by an authorisedVolvo workshop.

WARNING

The system is a supplement to, not areplacement for, a safe driving style and useof the rearview mirrors. It can never replacethe driver's attention and responsibility. Theresponsibility for changing lanes safelyalways rests with the driver.

The system is designed to work most effec-tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lanehighways.

When a camera has detected a vehicleinside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp

illuminates with a constant glow.

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the carwhere the system has detected the vehicle.If the car is overtaken on both sides at thesame time then both lamps illuminate.

BLIS advises the driver with a message if a faultarises in the system. If for example the sys-tem's cameras are obscured then the BLISindicator lamp flashes and a message is shownon the information display. In such cases,check and clean the lenses.

If necessary, the system can be switched offtemporarily by pressing the BLIS button, seepage 181.

Blind spots

G01

7834

A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3 m


G02

1428

Button for activating/deactivating.




04


BLIS is activated when the engine is started.The indicator lamps in the door panels flashthree times when BLIS is activated.

The system can be deactivated/activatedwhen the engine is started by pressing theBLIS button.

When BLIS is deactivated the light in the buttongoes out and a text message is shown on thedashboard display.

When BLIS is activated the light in the buttonilluminates, a new text message is shown onthe display and the indicator lamps in the doorpanels flash three times. Press the READ but-ton to clear the text message. For more infor-mation on messages, see page 121.

When BLIS operatesThe system operates when the car is driven ata speed above 10 km/h.

OvertakingThe system is designed to react if:

• you overtake another vehicle at a speed ofup to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle

• you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling upto 70 km/h faster than you are travelling.

WARNING

BLIS does not work in sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is revers-ing.

A wide trailer coupled to the car can concealother vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre-vent the vehicle in the screened area frombeing detected by BLIS.

Daylight and darknessIn daylight the system reacts to the shape ofthe surrounding vehicles. The system isdesigned to detect motor vehicles such ascars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.

In darkness the system reacts to the head-lamps of surrounding vehicles. If the head-lamps of surrounding vehicles are not switchedon then the system does not detect the vehi-cles. This means for example that the systemdoes not react to a trailer without headlampswhich is towed behind a car or truck.

WARNING

The system does not react to bicycles ormopeds.

The BLIS cameras can be disrupted byintensive light or when driving in the darkwhen there are no light sources (e.g. streetlighting or other vehicles). The system maythen interpret the lack of light as if the cam-eras have been blocked.

In both cases a message is shown in theinformation display.

When driving in such conditions systemperformance may be temporarily deterio-rate and a text message is shown, seepage 182. If the message disappears auto-matically then BLIS has returned to normalfunctionality.

The BLIS cameras have limitations similar tothe human eye, i.e. they "see" worse inheavy snowfall or thick fog for example.

CleaningIn order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-era lenses must be clean. The lenses can becleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.Clean the lenses carefully so that they are notscratched.




04


IMPORTANT

The lenses are electrically heated to melt iceor snow. If necessary, brush snow awayfrom the lenses.

Messages on the display


Blind-spot infosystem ON

BLIS system on

Blind spot syst.Service required

BLIS not function-ing.

Contact an author-ised Volvo work-shop.

Blind spot syst.Camera blocked

The BLIS camera isblocked by dirt,snow or ice. Cleanthe lenses.


Blind spot syst.Reduced function

The BLIS camera isdisrupted by fog orstrong sunlight shin-ing directly into thecamera.

The camera resetsitself when the envi-ronment hasreturned to normal.

Blind-spot infosystem OFF

BLIS system off

LimitationsIn some situations the BLIS indicator lamp mayilluminate despite there being no other vehiclewithin the blind spot.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso-lated occasions despite there being noother vehicle within the blind spot then thisdoes not mean that a fault has arisen in thesystem.

In the event of a fault in the BLIS system thedisplay shows the text Blind spot syst.Service required.

Here are several examples of situations wherethe BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even ifthere is no other vehicle within the blind spot.

G02

1430

Reflection from shiny wet road surface.

G02

1431

Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g.noise barrier or concrete road surface.




04


G02

1432

Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.



Comfort inside the passenger compartment

04

185

Storage spaces

G01

9417




04


Storage compartment in door panel

Storage pocket* on front edge of front seatcushions

Ticket clip

Glovebox

Storage compartment, cup holder

Jacket holder

Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat

Storage pocket

Jacket holderThe jacket holder is only designed for lightclothing.

Tunnel console

G02

3985

Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discs)and AUX input under the armrest (and stor-age tray*).

Includes cup holder for driver and passen-ger, and 12 V socket and small compart-ment. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter arespecified then the 12 V socket is replacedby a cigarette lighter and the small com-partment by a detachable ashtray.)

Cigarette lighter and ashtray*The ashtray in the tunnel console is emptied bylifting it straight up.

Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pullout the lighter and light a cigarette on theheated coils.

Glovebox

G02

4206

The owner's manual and maps can be kepthere for example. There are also holders forpens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox canbe locked with the key blade, see page 43.

Floor mats*Volvo supplies specially manufactured floormats.

WARNING

The floor mat at the driver's seat must befirmly fitted and secured in the attachmentclips to prevent it from being trappedaround and under the pedals.




04


Vanity mirror

G02

1438

Vanity mirror with lighting.

The lamp for the vanity mirror, on the driver'sside* and passenger side respectively, isswitched on automatically when the cover israised.

12 V socket

G02

1439

12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.

G02

1440

12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.

The electrical socket can be used for 12 Vaccessories, such as mobile phone chargersand coolers. The maximum current is 10 A. For

the socket to supply current, the remote con-trol key must be in at least position I, seepage 71.

WARNING

Always leave the plug in the socket whenthe socket is not in use.

Electrical socket in cargo area*

G01

7825

Fold down the cover to access the electricalsocket. It works irrespective of whether or notthe ignition is switched on.

NOTE

Do not use the electric socket with theengine switched off as there is a risk of thebattery becoming discharged.



Bluetooth handsfree*

04


General

G02

1443

System overview.

Mobile phone

Microphone


Centre console

BluetoothTM

A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM

can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys-tem. The audio system then works handsfree,with the option to control a range of the mobilephone's functions remotely. The mobile phonecan be operated by its own keys irrespective ofwhether or not it is connected.

NOTE

Only a selection of mobile phones is fullycompatible with the handsfree function.Information on compatible phones is avail-able at Volvo dealers and atwww.volvocars.com.

Phone functions, controls overview

G02

1444

Centre console control panel.

VOLUME – Same functionality available insteering wheel keypad.

Number and letter buttons

PHONE - On/off and standby mode

Navigation button

EXIT - End/refuse phone calls, clearentered characters, interrupt current func-

tion. Same functionality available in steer-ing wheel keypad.

ENTER – Accept calls. A press of the but-ton reveals latest dialled numbers. Samefunctionality available in steering wheelkeypad.

RememberThe menus are controlled from the centre con-sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen-eral information on menus, see page 118.

Activating/deactivatingA short press on PHONE activates the hands-free function. The text PHONE at the top of thedisplay shows that it is in phone mode. Thesymbol shows that the handsfree func-tion is active.

One long press on PHONE deactivates thehandsfree function and disconnects a con-nected phone.

Connect mobile phoneA mobile phone is connected in different waysdepending on whether or not it has been con-nected previously. To connect a mobile phonefor the first time, follow the instructions below:




04


Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system

1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visiblevia BluetoothTM, see mobile phone manualor www.volvocars.com.

2. Activate the handsfree function withPHONE.> Menu option Add phone appears on

the display. If one or more mobilephones have already been registeredthen these are also shown.

3. Select Add phone.> The audio system searches for mobile

phones in the vicinity. The search takesapproximately 30 seconds. The mobilephones detected are specified with theirrespective BluetoothTM name in the dis-play. The handsfree function'sBluetoothTM name is shown in themobile phone such as My Car.

4. Choose one of the mobile phones in theaudio system display.

5. Enter the number series shown in the audiosystem display via the mobile phone key-pad.

Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system

1. Activate the handsfree function withPHONE. If there is a phone connected,disconnect the connected phone.

2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, seethe mobile phone manual.

3. Select My Car in the list of units detectedin your mobile phone.

4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobilephone when prompted for the PIN code.

5. Select to connect to My Car from themobile phone.

The mobile phone is registered and connectedautomatically to the audio system while the textSynchronising is shown in the display. Formore information on how mobile phones areregistered, see page 191.

When the connection is established the symbolis shown and the mobile phone

BluetoothTM name is shown in the display. Nowthe mobile phone can be controlled from theaudio system.

To call1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown

at the top of the display and that thesymbol is visible.

2. Dial the number or use the phone book,see page 191.

3. Press ENTER.

The call is interrupted with EXIT.

Disconnecting the mobile phoneAutomatic disconnection takes place if themobile phone moves out of the audio system'srange. For more information on connection,see page 191.

Manual disconnection takes place by deacti-vating the handsfree function with one longpress on PHONE. The handsfree function isalso deactivated when the engine is switchedoff or when a door is opened 1.

When the mobile phone has been discon-nected an ongoing call can be continued withthe mobile phone's built-in microphone andspeaker.

1 Only Keyless Drive




04


NOTE

Some mobile phones require that thechangeover from handsfree is confirmedfrom the phone's keypad.

Making and receiving calls

Incoming callCalls are accepted with ENTER even if theaudio system is in CD or FM mode for example.Refuse or end with EXIT.

Automatic answerThe automatic answer function means thatcalls are accepted automatically.

Activate/deactivate under Phone settingsCall options Automatic answer.

In call menuPress MENU or ENTER during an ongoing callto access the following functions:

• Mute microphone - audio system micro-phone is muted.

• Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans-ferred to the mobile phone.

NOTE

With certain mobile phones the connectionis terminated when the privacy function isused. This is normal. The handsfree functionasks if you want to reconnect.

• Phone book – searching in the phonebook.

NOTE

A new call cannot be started during anongoing call.

Audio settings

Phone call volumeThe call volume can be regulated when thehandsfree function is in phone mode. Use thesteering wheel keypad or VOLUME.

Audio system volumeProviding there is no ongoing call taking place,the audio system volume is controlled as usualwith VOLUME. In order to control audio systemvolume during an ongoing call you have toswitch to one of the audio sources.

The audio source can be automatically mutedfor incoming calls under Phone settingsSounds and volume Mute radio.

Ring volumeGo to Phone settings Sounds and volume

Ring volume and adjust with / on thenavigation button.

Ring signalsThe handsfree function has integrated ring sig-nals that can be selected under Phonesettings Sounds and volume Ringsignals Ring signal 1, 2, 3 etc.

NOTE

The connected mobile phone's ring signal isnot deactivated when one of the handsfreesystem's integrated signals is used.

In order to select the connected phone's ringsignal 2, go to Phone settings Sounds andvolume Ring signals Use mobilephone signal.

2 Not supported by all mobile phones.




04


More on registering and connectingA maximum of five mobile phones can be reg-istered. Registration is performed once perphone. After registration the phone no longerneeds to be visible/detectable. A maximum ofone mobile phone can be connected at a time.Phones can be deregistered under Bluetooth

Remove phone.

Automatic connectionWhen the handsfree function is active and thelast mobile phone connected is in range it isconnected automatically. When the audio sys-tem searches for the last phone connected itsname is shown in the display. To change overto manual connection of another phone, pressEXIT.

Manual connectionIf you want to connect a mobile phone otherthan the last connected or change the con-nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:

1. Set the audio system in phone mode.

2. Press PHONE and select one of thephones in the list.

The connection can also be made via the menusystem under Bluetooth Connect phoneor Change phone.

Phone bookAll use of the phone book presupposes that thetext PHONE is shown at the top of the displayand that the symbol is visible.

The audio system stores a copy of the phonebook from each registered mobile phone. Thephone book is copied automatically to theaudio system during each connection.

Deactivate the function under Phonesettings Synchronise phone book.Searching for contacts is only performed inthe connected mobile phone's phonebook.

NOTE

If the mobile phone does not support copy-ing of the phone book then List is empty isshown when copying is finished.

If the phone book contains a ringing caller'scontact information then this is shown in thedisplay.

Searching for contactsThe easiest way to search in the phone book iswith long presses on the keys 2–9. This startsa search in the phone book based on the key'sfirst letter.

The phone book can also be reached with /on the navigation button or with / on

the steering wheel keypad. The search can alsobe performed from the phone book's Searchmenu under Phone book Search:

1. Enter the first few letters of the contact andpress ENTER, or simply press ENTER.

2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER tocall.

Voice recognitionThe mobile phone's voice recognition functionfor dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.

Voice mail numberVoice mail number can be changed underPhone settings Call options Voice mailnumber. If there is no number stored then thismenu can be reached with one long press on1. Press 1 for a long time to use the storednumber.

Call listsThe call lists are copied to the handsfree func-tion at each new connection and are thenupdated during the connection. Press ENTERto show the last dialled. Other call lists areavailable under Call register.




04


NOTE

Certain mobile phones show a list of the lastdialled calls in reverse order.

Inputting textInput text using the keypad in the centre con-sole. Press once for the key's first character,twice for the second etc. Continue pressing formore characters, see the following table.

A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-acter. One long press on EXIT clears all inputcharacters. / on the navigation buttonscrolls between the characters.

Key Function

Space . 1 - ? ! , : " ' ( )

A B C 2 Ä Å À Æ Ç

D E F 3 È É

G H I 4 Ì

J K L 5

M N O 6 Ñ Ö Ò Ø

Key Function

P Q R S 7 ß

T U V 8 Ü Ù

W X Y Z 9

Pressed briefly if two charactersshall be entered after each otherwith the same key.

+ 0 @ * # & $ £ / %

Shift between upper and lowercase letter



Built-in phone*

04


General

G02

1446

System overview.

Microphone

SIM card reader

Control panel

Privacy handset

SafetyOnly entrust phone servicing to an authorisedVolvo workshop. The built-in phone must beswitched off during refuelling or in the vicinityof blasting work. IDIS limits the menu systemdepending on the speed of the car, seepage 195.

Remember

SIM cardThe phone can only be used with a valid SIMcard (Subscriber Identity Module). For installa-tion, see page 196. Emergency calls to emer-gency numbers can be made without a SIMcard.

NOTE

The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIMcards. Combined 3G/GSM cards work.Contact the network operator if the SIMcard needs to be changed.

Menus and controlsThe menus are navigated using the controlpanel and the steering wheel keypad.For general information on menus, seepage 118. For information on the phone's con-trols, see page 188.

On/OffSwitch on the phone with a short press onPHONE. Enter the PIN code if necessary. The

symbol shows that the phone isswitched on. When this symbol is shown callscan be received even if the CD menu for exam-ple is shown in the display. Briefly pressPHONE to use the phone menus and to dial

out. The text PHONE shows that the phonemenu is active.

Switch off the phone with one long press onPHONE.

Making and receiving calls

Making calls1. Switch on the phone.

2. If PHONE is not shown in the display,briefly press PHONE.

3. Dial the number or use the phone book,see page 194.

4. Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick upthe privacy handset. Release the handsetby pulling it down.

Ending a callEnd a call by pressing EXIT or by hanging upthe privacy handset.

Incoming callPress ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up theprivacy handset. If the privacy handset is offthe hook when the phone rings then calls mustbe received using ENTER.

End calls by pressing EXIT or by hanging upthe privacy handset. Refuse calls using EXIT.


Keypad, see page 135


Built-in phone*

04


Automatic answerSee page 190.

Call waitingThe function enables a new call to be answeredduring an ongoing call. The new call isanswered as usual and the previous call is puton hold.

Activate/deactivate under Phone settingsCall options Call waiting.

Automatic diversionsIncoming calls can be diverted automaticallydepending on the type of call and situation.

Activate/deactivate under Call optionsDiversions.

During a callPress MENU or ENTER during a call to accessthe In-call menu.

To call1. Put the call on hold under Hold.

2. Dial the number of the third party or use thePhone book menu option.

Switch between calls using the Swap menuoption.

Conference callA conference call consists of several parties. Itcan be initiated when a call is underway andanother is on hold. The Join menu option startsthe conference call.

All ongoing calls are disconnected if the con-ference call is terminated.

Switching between the privacy handsetand handsfreeSwitch from handsfree to the privacy handsetby picking up the privacy handset or selectingHandset in the menu.

Switch from the privacy handset to handsfreeusing the Handsfree menu option.

Mute modeMute mode involves deactivating the micro-phone, see page 193.

Activate/deactivate the microphone usingthe Microphone On/Off menu option.

Audio settings

Phone call volumeThe phone uses the front door speakers. Callvolume can be controlled when the textPHONE is shown at the top of the display.

Use the steering wheel keypad orVOLUME.

Audio system volumeSee page137.

Signals and volumeChange the ring signal under Phone settings

Sounds and volume Ring signals.

Activate/deactivate the message beep underPhone settings Sounds and volumeMessage beep.

Control the ring volume under Phone settingsSounds and volume Ring volume.

Adjust using / on the navigation button.



Built-in phone*

04


Phone bookContact information can be stored on the SIMcard or in the phone.

Storing contacts in the phone book1. Press MENU and scroll to Phone book

New contact.

2. Enter a name and press ENTER. For infor-mation on text input, see below.

3. Enter a number and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory andpress ENTER.

Inputting textSee page 192.

Searching for contactsSee page 191.

Erasing contactsErase a contact in the phone book by selectingit and pressing ENTER. Then scroll to Eraseand press ENTER.

Erase all contacts under Phone book EraseSIM or Erase phone.

Copying entries between the SIM cardand the phone bookGo to Phone book Copy all SIM tophone or Phone to SIM and press ENTER.

Voice mail numberSee page 191.

Other functions and settings

IDISIDIS (Intelligent Driver Information System)can, in active driving situations, delay or refusering signals from incoming calls. This way lessattention is distracted from driving.

IDIS is deactivated under Phone settingsIDIS.

Reading messages1. Scroll to Messages Read and press

ENTER.

2. Scroll to a message and press ENTER.

3. The message text is shown in the display.Additional selections can be made bypressing ENTER.

Writing and sending messages1. Scroll to Messages Write new and

press ENTER.

2. Enter text and press ENTER. For informa-tion on text input, see page 192.

3. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.

4. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.

Message settingsMessage settings are not normally changed.The network provider has further informationon these settings. There are three optionsunder Messages Message settings:

• SMSC number - Specifies the messagecentre which will transfer the messages.

• Validity time - Specifies how long themessage will be stored in the messagecentre.

• Message type.

Call listsLists of received, dialled and missed calls arestored in Call register. Dialled calls are alsoshown by pressing ENTER. The phone num-bers in the lists can be saved in the phonebook.

Call durationCall duration is stored under Call registerCall duration.

Reset the values under Call registerCall duration Reset timers.

Show/hide number for third partyThe phone number can be temporarily hiddenunder Call options Send my number.



Built-in phone*

04


IMEI numberIn order to block a phone the network providermust be advised of the phone's IMEI number.

Dial *#06# to show the number in the dis-play. Write it down and keep it in a safeplace.

Network selectionThe network can be selected either automati-cally or manually under Phone settingsNetwork selection.

SIM code and securityThe PIN code can protect the SIM card fromunauthorised use.

The code can be changed under Phonesettings Edit PIN code.

Change the security level under Phonesettings SIM security.

Select maximum security with the On option.The code will then need to be entered eachtime the phone is switched on.

Select the next highest security level with theAutomatic option. The phone then stores thecode and automatically specifies it when thephone is switched on. When the SIM card isused with another phone the code must beentered manually.

Select minimum security with the Off option.The SIM card can then be used without thecode at all.

Reset to factory settingsThe phone settings are fully reset under Phonesettings Reset phone settings.

Installing the SIM card

G02

1450

G02

1451

Make sure that the phone is deactivated.Pull out the SIM card holder which islocated in the glovebox.

Place the SIM card with the metal surfacevisible and fit the cover on the SIM cardholder . Refit the SIM card holder.



04

197



Recommendations during driving......................................................... 200Refuelling.............................................................................................. 202Fuel....................................................................................................... 203Loading................................................................................................. 206Cargo area............................................................................................ 209Warning triangle*................................................................................... 213Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 214Towing and recovery............................................................................. 219


05DURING YOUR JOURNEY


05 During your journey

Recommendations during driving

05

200

General

Economical drivingEconomical driving and reducing environmen-tal impact result from driving gently with antic-ipation and adapting your driving style andspeed to the current situation (for furtheradvice on how you can reduce environmentalimpact, see page 9).

• Do not let the engine idle, but drive at lightloads as soon as it is possible.

• A cold engine consumes more fuel than awarm one.

• Do not drive with unnecessary loads in thecar.

• Do not use winter tyres when the roads aredry.

• Remove the load carrier when it is not inuse.

• Use the parking heater* in cold weather sothat the engine reaches its normal operat-ing temperature more quickly.

Driving in waterThe car can be driven through water at a maxi-mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercisedwhen passing through flowing water.

During driving in water, maintain a low speedand do not stop the car. When the water has

been passed, depress the brake pedal lightlyand check that full brake function is achieved.Water and mud for example can make thebrake linings wet resulting in delayed brakefunction.

Clean the electric contacts of the electricengine block heater and trailer coupling afterdriving in water and mud.

Do not let the car stand with water over the sillsfor any long period of time. This could causeelectrical malfunctions.

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water entersthe air filter.

In depths greater than 25 cm, water couldenter the transmission. This reduces thelubricating ability of the oils and shortensthe service life of the systems.

In the event of stalling in water, do not try torestart - tow the car out of the water to anauthorised Volvo workshop. Risk of enginebreakdown.

Engine and cooling systemUnder special conditions, for example whendriving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or withheavy loads, there is a risk that the engine andcooling system will overheat. Proceed as fol-lows to avoid overheating the engine.

• Maintain a low speed when driving with atrailer up long, steep ascents.

• Do not turn the engine off immediately youstop after a hard drive.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine's cooling fan tooperate for a while after the engine has beenswitched off.

• Remove any auxiliary lamps from in frontof the grille when driving in extreme hightemperatures.

• Do not exceed engine speeds of4500 rpm (3500 rpm for diesel engines) ifdriving with a trailer or caravan in hilly ter-rain. The oil temperature could become toohigh.

Open tailgateAvoid driving with the tailgate open. If it is how-ever necessary, only drive for a short distance.Close all windows, set the air distribution to thewindscreen and floor and run the fan at thehighest speed.

WARNING

Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxicexhaust fumes could be drawn into the carthrough the cargo area.



Recommendations during driving

05

201

Do not overload the batteryThe electrical functions in the car load the bat-tery to varying degrees. Avoid using the ignitionposition II when the engine is switched off. Useignition position I instead, as less power is con-sumed.

Also, be aware of different accessories thatload the electrical system. Do not use functionswhich use a lot of power when the engine isswitched off. Examples of functions that use alot of power:

• ventilation fan

• windscreen wipers

• audio system (high volume)

• parking lamps

If the battery voltage is low, a message appearson the information display. The energy-savingfunction shuts down certain functions orreduces certain functions such as the ventila-tion fan and audio system. Charge the batteryby starting the engine.

Before a long journey• Check that the engine is working normally

and that fuel consumption is normal.

• Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oilor other fluid).

• Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.

• Carrying a warning triangle is a legalrequirement in certain countries.

Winter drivingCheck the following in particular before thecold season:

• The engine coolant must contain at least50% glycol. This mixture protects theengine down to approximately –35 °C. Toachieve optimum antifreeze protection,different types of glycol must not be mixed.

• The fuel tank must be kept filled to preventcondensation.

• Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils withlower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star-ting in cold weather and also reduce fuelconsumption while the engine is cold. Formore information on suitable oils, seepage 276.

IMPORTANT

Low viscosity oil must not be used for harddriving or in hot weather.

• The condition of the battery and chargelevel must be inspected. Cold weather pla-ces great demands on the battery and itscapacity is reduced by the cold.

• Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in thewasher fluid reservoir.

To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec-ommends using winter tyres on all four wheelsif there is a risk of snow or ice.

NOTE

The use of winter tyres is a legal requirementin certain countries. Studded tyres are notpermitted in certain countries.

Slippery driving conditionsPractise driving on slippery surfaces undercontrolled conditions to learn how the carreacts.



Refuelling

05

202

Refuelling

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

G02

1459

Open the fuel filler flap using the button on thelighting panel. The filler flap is located on theright-hand rear wing, as indicated by the sym-bol's arrow in the information display.

Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until aclick confirms that it is closed.

Opening/closing the fuel cap

WARNING!AVERTISSEMENT!

ACHTUNG!

G02

1395

A certain overpressure may arise in the tank inthe event of high outside temperatures. Openthe cap slowly.

After refuelling, refit the cap and turn it until oneor more clicking sounds are heard.

Filling up with fuelDo not overfill the tank but fill until the pumpnozzle cuts out.

NOTE

Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hotweather.

Opening the fuel filler flap manually

G00

0000

The fuel filler flap can be opened manuallywhen electric opening from the passengercompartment is not possible.

Open the side hatch in the cargo area(same side as fuel filler flap).

Locate the green cord with handle.

Pull the cord straight back until the fuel fillerflap folds out with a "click".



Fuel

05

203

General information on fuelFuel of a lower quality than that recommendedby Volvo must not be used as engine powerand fuel consumption is negatively affected.

WARNING

Always avoid inhaling fuel fumes and fuelsplashing in the eyes.

If fuel gets into your eyes, take out contactlenses if worn and rinse your eyes withplenty of water for at least 15 minutes andseek medical attention.

Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,bioethanol and mixtures of the two, as wellas diesel, are highly toxic and could causepermanent injury or be fatal if swallowed.Seek medical attention immediately if fuelhas been swallowed.

WARNING

Fuel which spills onto the ground can beignited.

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-ting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phonewhen refuelling. The ring signal could causespark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,leading to fire and injury.

IMPORTANT

The use of other fuels for each respectiveengine type, other than recommended hereby Volvo, could cause engine damage andimpaired performance.

The use of other fuels also invalidates Vol-vo's warranties as well as any supplemen-tary service agreement.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with atrailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-nation with fuel grade are factors that couldaffect the car's performance.

PetrolPetrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Mostengines can be run with octane ratings of 95and 98 RON. 91 RON should only be used inexceptional cases.

• 95 RON can be used for normal driving.

• 98 RON is recommended for optimum per-formance and minimum fuel consumption.

When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,fuel with the highest possible octane rating isrecommended for optimum performance andfuel economy.

IMPORTANT

• Always refuel with unleaded petrol so asnot to damage the catalytic converter.

• In order that Volvo's warranty shallremain valid, never mix alcohol with pet-rol, as the fuel system could be dam-aged.

• Do not use additives not recommendedby Volvo.

Catalytic convertersThe purpose of the catalytic converters is topurify exhaust gases. They are located close tothe engine so that operating temperature isreached quickly.

The catalytic converters consist of a monolith(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channelwalls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho-dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem-ical reaction without being used up them-selves.

Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensorThe Lambda-sond is part of a control systemintended to reduce emissions and improve fueleconomy.

An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen contentof the exhaust gases leaving the engine. Thisvalue is fed into an electronic system that con-



Fuel

05

204

tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuelto air directed to the engine is continuouslyadjusted. These adjustments create optimalconditions for efficient combustion, andtogether with the three-way catalytic converterreduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, car-bon monoxide and nitrous oxides).

Bioethanol E85Do not modify the fuel system or its compo-nents, and do not replace components withparts that are not specifically designed for usewith bioethanol.

WARNING

Methanol must not be used. A decal on theinside of the fuel filler flap shows the correctalternative fuel.

The use of components not designed forbioethanol engines could cause fire, injuryor engine damage.

Reserve fuel canThe reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol,see page 97.

WARNING

Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosivegases could form in the reserve fuel can if itis refuelled with ethanol.

DieselDiesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to con-taminants, such as excessively high volumesof sulphur particles for example. Only use die-sel fuel from well-known producers. Never usediesel of dubious quality.

At low temperatures (-40 °C to -6 °C), a paraffinprecipitate may form in the diesel fuel, whichmay lead to ignition problems. Special dieselfuel designed for low temperatures aroundfreezing point is available from the major oilcompanies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-cipitate.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank isreduced if the tank is kept well filled. Whenrefuelling, check that the area around the fuelfiller pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto thepaintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-gent and water.

IMPORTANT

Only ever use fuel that fulfils the Europeandiesel standard.

The sulphur content must be a maximum of50 ppm.

IMPORTANT

Diesel type fuels which must not be used:

• Special additives

• Marine Diesel Fuel

• Fuel oil

• RME 1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegeta-ble oil.

These fuels do not fulfil the requirements inaccordance with Volvo recommendationsand generate increased wear and enginedamage that is not covered by the Volvowarranty.

Empty tankNo special procedures are required if the tankruns dry. The fuel system is bled automaticallyif the remote control is kept in key position II(see page 71) for approx. 60 seconds beforethe start attempt.

1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.



Fuel

05


Draining condensation from the fuel filterThe fuel filter separates condensation from thefuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-tion.

The fuel filter must be drained at the intervalsspecified in the Service and Warranty Bookletor if you suspect that the car has been filledwith contaminated fuel.

IMPORTANT

Certain special additives remove the waterseparation in the fuel filter.

Diesel particle filter (DPF)Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,which results in more efficient emission con-trol. The particles in the exhaust gases arecollected in the filter during normal driving. So-called "regeneration" is started in order to burnaway the particles and empty the filter. Thisrequires the engine to have reached normaloperating temperature.

Regeneration of the filter takes place automat-ically at an interval of approximately300-900 km depending on driving conditions.Regeneration normally takes 10-20 minutes. Itmay take a little longer at a low average speed.Fuel consumption may increase slightly duringregeneration.

Regeneration in cold weatherIf the car is frequently driven short distances incold weather then the engine does not reachnormal operating temperature. This means thatregeneration of the diesel particle filter doesnot take place and the filter is not emptied.

When the filter has become approximately80% full of particles, a warning triangle on theinstrument panel illuminates, and the messageSoot filter full. See manual is shown on theinstrument panel display.

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the caruntil the engine reaches normal operating tem-perature, preferably on a main road or motor-way. The car should then be driven forapproximately ca 20 minutes more.

When regeneration is complete the warningtext is cleared automatically.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather so thatthe engine reaches normal operating tempera-ture more quickly.

IMPORTANT

If the filter fills up with particles then it canbe difficult to start the engine and the filterwill be incapable of functioning. Then thereis a risk that the filter will have to bereplaced.

Fuel consumption and emissions ofcarbon dioxideFuel consumption figures may change if the caris equipped with extra equipment that affectsthe car's weight. See the table on page 281.

The manner in which the car is driven, andother non-technical factors can also affect fuelconsumption.

Consumption is higher and power output lowerfor fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, towing a traileror driving at high altitudes in combinationwith fuel grade are factors that could affectthe car's performance.



Loading

05

206

GeneralThe load capacity is affected by what is moun-ted on the car, such as a towbar, load carriersand roof box. The load capacity of the car isalso reduced by the number of passengers andtheir weight.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics changedepending on the weight and distribution ofthe load.

Loading the cargo area• Position the load firmly against the back-

rest in front.

• Put wide loads in the centre.

• Heavy objects should be placed as low aspossible.

• Cover sharp edges with something soft toavoid damaging the upholstery.

• Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-lets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING

A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in afrontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carrythe impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.

Always secure the load.

WARNING

The protection provided by the inflatablecurtain in the headlining may be compro-mised or eliminated if the load is too high.Never load cargo above the backrest. Dur-ing heavy braking the load may otherwiseshift, causing injury to the car's occupants.

WARNING

Always secure the load. During heavy brak-ing the load may otherwise shift, causinginjury to the car's occupants.

Protect sharp edges with something soft.

Turn off the engine and apply the parkingbrake when loading or unloading longobjects. Otherwise you may accidentallyknock the gear lever or gear selector withthe load and cause a gear to engage and thecar to move off.

Lowering the rear seat backrestTo simplify loading in the cargo area, the rearseats of the car can be folded down, seepage 74.

Securing loads

G00

0000

G01

7741

On both sides of the cargo area there are sev-eral mounting points designed for securingloads. They are located in the floor and in thetop edge of both sides of the cargo area.

WARNING

Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that areloose or protrude could cause injury duringheavy braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects witha seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.



Loading

05

207

Floor rails

G01

8135

Load secured in both upper and lower mountingpoints.

In the floor of the cargo area there are two railswith movable cargo retaining hooks for secur-ing items in the cargo area using cargo retain-ing straps.

IMPORTANT

Do not use other adjustable straps as thesecould pull and break the mounting points.

CleaningDirt and objects collecting down in the railscould hinder the repositioning, locking, raisingand removal of the cargo retaining hooks.Make it a habit to clean the tracks with a vac-uum cleaner and a lightly-moistened soft cloth.

Cargo retaining straps

G01

9397

Strap retention.

One loop of the cargo retaining strap aroundone of the cargo retaining hooks secures thestrap and prevents it from sliding around thehook.

NOTE

A suitable width for a cargo retaining strapis approx. 25 mm.

Moving a cargo retaining hook

G01

7742

Fold the cargo retaining hook down in thedirection to which its opening points.

Press the hook down lightly and at thesame time push it to the required position.

Fold the hook up – it is self-locking.

NOTE

There must be at least 50 cm between thecargo retaining hooks in the rail.



Loading

05

208

Removing a cargo retaining hook

G01

8134

The cargo retaining hooks can be easilyremoved from the rail, e.g. for cleaning the bot-tom of the rail.

Fold the cargo retaining hook down in thedirection to which its opening points.

Press the hook down lightly and at thesame time slide it to the cut-out opening.

Lift the hook straight up.

Securing the hook takes place in reverse order.

NOTE

A removed hook must be pressed downlightly at the same time in order to enable itsreinsertion into the rail.

Cargo retaining hook correctly fitted/incorrectly fitted

G01

9581

Fit the cargo retaining hooks correctly!

It is important that the cargo retaining hooksare fitted correctly. The hooks' openings mustpoint away from each other.

WARNING

Fit the cargo retaining hooks correctly. Oth-erwise the cargo retaining strap will movethe cargo retaining hook down so that itloosens and the strap slides off.



Cargo area

05


Bag holder*

G01

7745

Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.

The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place andprevents them from overturning and spreadingtheir contents across the cargo area.

1. Open the hatch that is part of the floor inthe cargo area.

2. Tension and secure the carrier bags usingthe strap.

Safety grille*

G01

7748

A protective grille prevents cargo from beingthrown forward in the passenger compartmentin the event of heavy braking. For safety rea-sons, the grille must always be mounted andsecured correctly.

Folding upTake hold of the bottom of the safety grille andpull back/up.

IMPORTANT

The safety grille cannot be folded up ordown when the cargo cover is fitted.

Installation

G01

8367

G01

8368

G01

8369



Cargo area

05


NOTE

The safety grille is most easily fitted andremoved by two people via the rear doors.

When fitting, the handle, see illustration– , must be on the front of the grille.

The backrests must be lowered to allow thesafety grille to be fitted, see page 74.

Position the handle in fitting position, seeillustration. Press gently on the handle toenable it to be turned into position, seearrow.

Press the strut in towards the grille andalign the grille in the roof mounting.

Turn the handle 90° . Press gently asillustrated if necessary. Secure the grilleby angling the handle 90° .

RemovalRemoval of the grille takes place in reverseorder to the description in the previous sectionentitled "Installation".

Safety net*

G02

4628

Storage space, safety net cassettes.

A rollable safety net comprising two cassetteshas a storage space under the cargo area floorhatch.

Securing the net cassettes

G00

0000

The two-part safety net cassette is secured onthe rear of the backrest. The narrowest cas-sette is secured on the left-hand side (seenfrom the tailgate).

1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.

2. Align the cassette's anchor rails in front ofthe backrest attachment lugs .

3. Slide the cassette into the attachment lugs.

4. Fold back and lock the backrests.

Removing the cassettes takes place in reverseorder

Using the safety net

G01

8246

Pull the net up from the cassettes. The net isself-locking after about 1 minute if the rearseat's backrests are raised.



Cargo area

05


Pull up the right-hand section of the netusing its strap.

Insert the rod in the mounting on the right-hand side and then press it forward – therod locks in with a click.

Pull out the rod's telescope section andclick it in on the other side.

Pull up the left-hand safety net and hook itinto the rod.

Folding up takes place in reverse order.

The net can also be used when the rear seat'sbackrest is folded forward.

Removing the net cassettes1. Roll the safety nets into the cassettes in

accordance with the procedure in the sec-tion entitled "Using the safety net", but inreverse.

2. Fold the whole backrest forward.

3. Slide the cassettes out until they loosenfrom the anchor rails.

Store the cassettes in their compartment underthe cargo area floor hatch.

WARNING

The load in the cargo area must be securelyanchored, even with a correctly fitted safetynet.

Safety net combined with cargo cover

G01

8247

Puller-straps for raising the net.

The safety net can also be raised from the rearseat when the cargo cover is extended.

Follow the procedure in the section entitledUsing the safety net. The straps for raising arelocated by the arrows.

Cargo cover*

G01

7749

Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook itinto the holes by the rear pillars in the cargoarea.

IMPORTANT

The safety grille cannot be folded up ordown when the cargo cover is fitted.

Fitting the cargo coverMove one end piece of the cover into therecess on the side panel.

Move the other end piece into the corres-ponding recess.

Press both sides in. A "click" should beaudible and the red marking should disap-pear.



Cargo area

05

212

> Check that both end pieces are locked.

Removing the cargo cover1. Press in one end piece button and lift it out.

2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and theother end piece loosens automatically.

Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealingdiscIn its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rearsealing disc protrudes horizontally into thecargo area when it is fitted.

Pull the sealing disc back gently, free fromits support shelves, and lower.

Long loadThe passenger seat backrest can also befolded for an extra long load, see page 72.

Roof load

Using load carriersTo avoid damaging the car and for maximumpossible safety while driving, the load carriersdesigned by Volvo are recommended.

Carefully follow the installation instructionssupplied with the carriers.

• Check periodically that the load carriersand load are properly secured. Lash theload securely with retaining straps.

• Distribute the load evenly over the loadcarriers. Put the heaviest objects at thebottom.

• The size of the area exposed to the wind,and therefore fuel consumption, increasewith the size of the load.

• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,heavy braking and hard cornering.

WARNING

The car's centre of gravity and driving cha-racteristics are altered by roof loads.

For information on maximum permitted roofload, including load carriers and any spacebox, see page 270.



Warning triangle*

05


G01

7956

G01

5352

G01

5353

Lift the floor mat and take out the warningtriangle.

Take the warning triangle from the case,fold out and assemble the two loose sides.

Fold out the warning triangle's supportlegs.

Follow the regulations for the use of a warningtriangle. Position the warning triangle in a suit-able place with regard to traffic.

Ensure the warning triangle and its case areproperly secured in the cargo area after use.

NOTE

If the floor hatch is not closed then privacylocking does not work, see page 45.

First aid*

G01

8253

A case with first aid equipment is located underthe floor in the cargo area.



Driving with a trailer

05

214

GeneralIf the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, thenthe car is delivered with the necessary equip-ment for driving with a trailer.

• The car's towing bracket must be of anapproved type.

• If the towbar is retrofitted, check with yourVolvo dealer that the car is fully equippedfor driving with a trailer.

• Distribute the load on the trailer so that theweight on the towing bracket complieswith the specified maximum towball load.

• Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-mended pressure for a full load. For tyrepressure label location, see page 259.

• Clean the towing bracket regularly andgrease the towball.

• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car isbrand new. Wait until it has been driven atleast 1000 km.

• The brakes are loaded much more thanusual on long and steep downhill slopes.Downshift to a lower gear and adjust yourspeed.

• The engine is loaded more heavily thanusual when driving with a trailer.

• If the car is driven with a heavy load in a hotclimate, the engine may overheat. If thetemperature in the engine's cooling systemis too high the warning symbol is illumi-

nated and the information display showsHigh engine temp Stop safely. Stop thecar in a safe way and allow the engine torun at idling speed for several minutes andcool down. If High engine temp Stopengine or Coolant level low, Stopengine are shown then the engine must beswitched off after stopping the car.

• The automatic gearbox has a built-in pro-tection system that engages in the event ofoverheating. If the temperature in the gear-box is too high the warning symbol is illu-minated and the information display showsTransmission hot Reduce speed orTransmission hot Stop safely. Followthe instructions and reduce speed or stopthe car in a safe way and allow the engineto run at idling speed for several minutes toenable the gearbox to cool down. In theevent of overheating the car's air condi-tioning may be temporarily switched off.

• In the interests of safety, you shouldrestrict speed to 80 km/h, even if the lawsof certain countries allow for higherspeeds.

• Move the gear selector to position P whenparking an automatic car with a hitchedtrailer. Always use the parking brake. Blockthe wheels with chocks when parking a carwith hitched trailer on a hill.

Trailer cableAn adapter is required if the car's towingbracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approvedby Volvo. Make sure the cable does not dragon the ground.

Direction indicators on trailerA symbol in the combined instrument panelflashes when the direction indicators are usedand the trailer is connected. If the symbolflashes more quickly then one of the lamps onthe car or the trailer is broken, see page 66.

Automatic gearbox

Parking on a hill1. Activate the parking brake.

2. Move the gear selector to position P.

Starting on a hill1. Move the gear selector to position D.

2. Release the parking brake.

Steep inclines• Do not use a higher manual gear than the

engine can "handle". It is not always eco-nomical to drive in high gears.

• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines ofmore than 15%.




05

215

Level controlThe rear shock absorbers maintain a constantheight irrespective of the car's load (up to themaximum permissible weight). When the car isstationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,which is normal.

Trailer weightsNational vehicle regulations can limit trailerweights and speeds. The towbar can be certi-fied for a higher towing weight than the car canactually tow. For Volvo's permitted trailerweights, see page 271.

WARNING

Follow the stated recommendations fortrailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailermay be difficult to control in the event ofsudden movement and braking.

Towing bracketIf the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,the towball mounting instructions must be fol-lowed carefully, see page 216.

WARNING

If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachabletowbar:

• Follow the assembly instructions for thetowball section carefully.

• The towball section must be locked withthe key before setting off.

• Check that the indicator window showsgreen.

Important checks• The towball section's towball must be

cleaned and greased regularly.

NOTE

If a towball hitch with vibration damper isused, it is not necessary to grease the tow-ball.

Storing the towball section

G03

1121

Towball section storage location

IMPORTANT

Always remove the towball section after useand store it in the appointed location in thecar, firmly fastened with its strap.




05

216

Specifications

G02

1485

B

A

G02

6080

F

H

EG

CD

G01

7971

Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

A (V70) 1129

A (XC70) 1113

B (V70) 93

B (XC70) 77

C 855

D 428

E 112

F 346

G Side member

H Ball centre

Installing the towball

G01

8928

Remove the protective cover by first press-ing in the catch and then pulling thecover straight back .

G02

1487

Ensure that the mechanism is in theunlocked position by turning the key clock-wise.




05

217

G02

1488

The indicator window must show red.

G02

1489

Insert the towball section until you hear aclick.

G02

1490

The indicator window must show green.

G00

0000

Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-tion. Remove the key from the lock.

G02

1494

Check that the towball section is secure bypulling it up, down and back.

WARNING

If the towball section is not fitted correctlythen it must be removed and refitted inaccordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT

Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,the remainder of the towball section shouldbe clean and dry.




05

218

G02

1495

Safety cable.

WARNING

Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable tothe correct place.

Removing the towball

G02

1496

Insert the key and turn it clockwise to theunlocked position.

G02

1497

Push in the locking wheel and turn itanticlockwise until you hear a click.

G02

1498

Turn the locking wheel down fully, until itcomes to a stop. Hold it in this positionwhile pulling the towball rearward andupward.

WARNING

Secure the towbar's loose towball safely ifit is stored in the car, see page 215.

G01

8929

Push the protective cover until it snapstight.



Towing and recovery

05

219

TowingFind out the highest legal speed for towingbefore towing the car.

1. Press the remote control key into the igni-tion switch to unlock the steering lock sothat the car can be steered, see page 96.

2. The remote control key must remain in theignition switch while the car is being towed.

3. Ensure the towrope is always taut by gentlydepressing the brake pedal to avoid violentjerks.

4. Be prepared to brake to stop.

WARNING

Insert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch to unlock the steering lock (so thatthe car can be steered) before towing.

WARNING

The steering lock stays in the position it wasin when the power was cut off. The steeringlock must be unlocked before towing. Theignition must be in position II. Never removethe remote control key from the ignitionswitch while driving or when the car is beingtowed.

WARNING

The brake servo and power steering do notwork when the engine is switched off. Thebrake pedal must be pressed about fivetimes harder than normal, and the steeringwill be considerably heavier than normal.

Manual gearboxMove gear lever into neutral and releasethe parking brake.

Automatic gearboxMove the gear selector to position N andrelease the parking brake.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed withthe wheels rolling forward.

• Cars with automatic gearbox must notbe towed at speeds above 80 km/h orfurther than 80 km.

Jump startingDo not tow the car to bump start it. Use a donorbattery if the battery is discharged to the extentthat the engine does not start, see page 99.

IMPORTANT

Bump starting the car can damage the cat-alytic converter.

Towing eyeUse the towing eye if the car needs to be towedon the road. The towing eye is attached in therecess on the right-hand side of the front orrear bumper.

After use, unscrew the towing eye and return itinto the cargo area.

Fitting the towing eye

G01

7464

Take out the towing eye that is locatedunder the floor hatch in the cargo area.



Towing and recovery

05

220

G02

1501

For the V70: Press the marked edge of thecover into the bumper and release. Foldaside the cover and screw in the towingeye firmly, right in up to the flange.

For the XC70: Release the bottom edge ofthe cover on the bumper with a screwdriveror coin. Screw in the towing eye firmly, rightin up to the flange. Use the wheel wrenchto tighten the towing eye.

NOTE

On certain cars with fitted towbar the towingeye cannot be secured in the rear mounting.In which case, secure the tow rope in thetowbar.

For this reason it is advisable to store adetachable towbar towball in the car.

Recovery

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed withthe wheels rolling forward.

• An all-wheel drive car (AWD) with raisedfront suspension must not be towed atspeeds above 70 km/h. It should not betowed further than 50 km.

WARNING

The towing eye is only designed for towingon roads - not for recovering the car. Call arecovery service for recovery assistance.



05

221


G02

0922

222

Engine compartment............................................................................. 224Lamps................................................................................................... 229Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 236Battery................................................................................................... 238Fuses..................................................................................................... 241Wheels and tyres................................................................................... 249Car care................................................................................................. 263Type designations................................................................................. 267Specifications........................................................................................ 269Type approval....................................................................................... 282


06MAINTENANCE AND SPECIF ICATIONS


06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

06

224

General

Volvo service programmeTo keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-ble, follow the Volvo service programme asspecified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.Have an authorised Volvo workshop carry outservice and maintenance work. Volvo work-shops have the personnel, special tools andservice literature to guarantee the highest qual-ity of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check andfollow the instructions in the Service andWarranty Booklet.

Check regularlyCheck the following oils and fluids at regularintervals, e.g. when refuelling:

• Coolant

• Engine oil

• Power steering fluid

• Washer fluid

WARNING

Bear in mind that the radiator fan may startautomatically some time after the enginehas been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a work-shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine ishot.

Opening and closing the bonnet

G02

1502

G01

0951

Pull the handle by the pedals. You will hearwhen the catch releases.

Move the catch to the left and open thebonnet. (The catch hook is locatedbetween the headlamp and grille, see illus-tration.)

WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly whenclosed.

Engine compartment, overview

G01

8945

The appearance of the engine compartment mayvary depending on engine variant.

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir



Engine compartment

06

225

Engine oil dipstick

Radiator

Filler opening for engine oil

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-handdrive)

Battery

Relay and fuse box, engine compartment

Filling washer fluid

Air filter.

WARNING

High voltage output from the ignition sys-tem. The voltage in the ignition system ishighly dangerous. The remote control keymust therefore always be in position 0 dur-ing work in the engine compartment, seepage 71.

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coilswhen the remote control key is in ignitionposition II or when the engine is hot.

Checking the engine oil

G02

1733

Decal for oil grade.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products. Whendriving under adverse conditions, seepage 275.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for theengine's service intervals all engines arefilled with a specially adapted syntheticengine oil at the factory. The choice of oilhas been made very carefully with regard toservice life, starting characteristics, fuelconsumption and environmental impact. Anapproved engine oil must be used in orderthat the recommended service intervals canbe applied. Only use a prescribed grade ofoil (see the engine compartment decal) forboth filling and oil change, otherwise youwill risk affecting service life, starting cha-racteristics, fuel consumption and environ-mental impact. Volvo Car Corporation dis-claims all warranty liability if engine oil of theprescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo uses different systems for warning of lowoil level or low oil pressure. Certain variantshave an oil pressure sensor, and then the lampfor oil pressure is used. Other variants have anoil level sensor, and then the driver is informedvia the warning symbol in the centre of theinstrument unit as well as by display texts. Cer-tain models have both variants. Contact aVolvo dealer for more information.



Engine compartment

06

226

Filling and dipstick

G02

1734

Petrol engine.

G02

1736

Diesel engine.

Change in accordance with the intervals speci-fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

IMPORTANT

When filling oil to top up, the oil being filledmust have the same grade, see page 275.

Checking the oil level in a new car is especiallyimportant before the first scheduled oil change.

The most accurate measurements are made ona cold engine before starting. The measure-ment will be inaccurate if taken immediatelyafter the engine is switched off. The dipstickwill indicate that the level is too low becausethe oil has not had time to flow down into theoil sump.

G02

1737

The oil level must be within the area marked on thedipstick.

Park the car on a level surface, switch off theengine and wait 10-15 minutes to allow the oil

time to run back to the sump. For capacities,see page 275 and onwards.

Checking with a cold engine1. Wipe the dipstick clean.

2. Check the level using the dipstick. It mustbe between the MIN and MAX marks.

3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, startby topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top upuntil the level is nearer to MAX than MINon the dipstick.

IMPORTANT

Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con-sumption may increase if too much oil ispoured into the engine.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifolddue to the risk of fire.

Checking with a warm engine1. Wipe the dipstick clean.

2. Check the oil level using the dipstick.

3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, startby topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top upuntil the level is nearer to MAX than MINon the dipstick.



Engine compartment

06

227

Coolant

Checking and topping up the coolant

G02

1738

When topping up the coolant, follow theinstructions on the packaging. It is importantthat the mixture of coolant concentrate andwater is correct for the prevailing weather con-ditions. Never top up with water only. The riskof freezing increases with both too little and toomuch coolant concentrate. For capacities, seepage 277.

IMPORTANT

• A high content of chlorine, chloridesand other salts may cause corrosion inthe cooling system.

• Always use coolant with anti-corrosionagent as recommended by Volvo.

• Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%water and 50% coolant.

• Mix the coolant with approved qualitytap water. In the event of any doubtabout water quality, used ready-mixedcoolant in accordance with Volvo rec-ommendations.

• When changing coolant/replacing cool-ing system components, flush the cool-ing system clean with approved qualitytap water or flush with ready-mixedcoolant.

• The engine must only be run with a well-filled cooling system. High tempera-tures can occur, causing a risk ofdamage (cracks) to the cylinder head.

For capacities and for standards regardingwater quality, see page 277.

Check the coolant regularlyThe level must lie between the MIN and MAXmarks on the expansion tank. If the system is

not filled sufficiently, high temperatures couldoccur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.

WARNING

Coolant can be very hot. If the coolantrequires topping up when the engine is atoperating temperature, unscrew the expan-sion tank cap slowly to gently release theoverpressure.

Brake and clutch fluid

Checking the levelBrake and clutch fluid have a common reser-voir. The level must be between the MIN andMAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir.Check the level regularly.

Change the brake fluid every other year or atevery other regular service.

For capacities and recommended fluid grade,see page 277. The fluid should be changedannually on cars driven in conditions requiringhard, frequent braking, such as driving inmountains or tropical climates with highhumidity.



Engine compartment

06

228

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in thebrake fluid reservoir, do not drive furtherbefore topping up the brake fluid. The rea-son for the loss of brake fluid must be inves-tigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Filling

G01

8939

The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side

The fluid reservoir is protected under the coverover the cold section in the engine compart-ment. The round cover must be removed firstbefore the reservoir cap can be reached.

1. Turn and open the cover located on thecovering.

2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.The level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks, which are located on theinside of the reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Remember to close the cap.

Power steering fluid

G02

1740

IMPORTANT

Keep the area around the power steeringfluid reservoir clean when checking.

Check the level frequently. The fluid does notrequire changing. The fluid level must bebetween the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci-

ties and recommended fluid grade, seepage 277.

NOTE

If a fault should arise in the power steeringsystem or if the engine is switched off andthe car must be towed, it can still be steered.



Lamps

06

229

GeneralAll bulb specifications are given on page 234.The following list contains bulbs and point-source lamps that are specialised or unsuitablefor changing except at a workshop:

• General interior lighting in the roof, readinglamps

• Glovebox lighting

• Direction indicators, door mirror

• Approach light duration

• Brake light, fog lamp, reversing lamp

• Rear side position lamps, position lamps

• Active Bi-Xenon , Bi-Xenon lights

• LED lamps, general

WARNING

On cars with Bi-Xenon and Active Bi-Xenonheadlamps, Xenon lamp replacement mustbe carried out at an authorised Volvo work-shop. The headlamps must be handled withextreme care due to the Xenon lamp's high-voltage unit.

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs withyour fingers. Grease and oils from your fin-gers are vaporised by the heat, coating thereflector and then causing damage.

Front lamp housing

G01

0479

G01

0325

All front bulbs (except those for fog lamps) arereplaced by first removing the whole lamphousing from the engine compartment.

WARNING

Always switch off the ignition and removethe remote control key before starting toreplace a bulb.

Removing the headlamp1.

ton and remove the remote control key.

2. (Upper illustration)

Withdraw the lamp housing's lockingpins.

Pull the lamp housing straight forward.

IMPORTANT

Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con-nector

3. (Lower illustration)

Detach the lamp housing connector bypressing down the clip with your thumb.

At the same time, guide out the con-nector with your other hand.

4. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on asoft surface to avoid scratching the lens.

5. Replace the bulb in question, seepage 234.

Installing the headlamp1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound

should be heard.


Press quickly on the START/STOP but-


Lamps

06

230

2. Reinstall the lamp housing and lockingpins. Check that they are correctlyinserted.

3. Check the lighting.

The lamp housing must be plugged in andinstalled before the lighting is switched on orthe remote control key is inserted into the igni-tion switch.

Removing the cover

G02

1745

Before starting to replace a bulb, seepage 229.

1. Open the lock clamp by pressing up/out.

2. Press down the clips on the cover andremove it.

Reinstall the cover in reverse order.

Dipped beam, halogen

G02

1746

1. Detach the headlamp.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holderdownwards.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap itin. It can only be secured in one position.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Main beam, Halogen

G02

1747


2. Remove the cover.

3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise.


5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socketand turn clockwise in order to secure it. Itcan only be secured in one position.




Lamps

06


Extra main beam Active Bi-Xenon andBi-Xenon *

G02

1748


2. Remove the cover, see page 230.

3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holderdownwards.


5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap itin. It can only be secured in one position.



G02

1749


2. Remove the cover, see page 230.

3. For better access, detach the main beambulb first.

4. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulbholder.

5. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.It can only be secured in one position.

6. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and pressuntil a clicking sound is heard.


Direction indicators/flashers

G02

1750


2. Remove the small round cover.

3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract thebulb.

4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.It can only be installed in one way.


6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted andpressed in until a clicking sound is heard.




Lamps

06

232

Side marker lamps

G02

1751



2. Remove the small round cover.

3. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulbholder.

4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.It can only be installed in one way.


6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted andpressed in until a clicking sound is heard.


Front fog lamps

G02

6015

1. Remove the cover by pressing in the 4 clipswith a thin blade and pulling straight out.

2. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and pullit out.

3. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it.

4. Fit a new bulb by turning clockwise.

5. Refit the bulb. (The profile of the bulbholder corresponds to the profile of thefoot of the bulb.)

6. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on thebulb holder must always be upward.

Lamp housing, rear, directionindicators

G01

7456

The direction indictor bulb in the rear lampcluster is replaced from inside the cargo area.

1. Open the panel.

2. Remove the insulation by pulling it straightout.

3. Loosen the whole of the lamp by turning itshandle anticlockwise.

4. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.


NOTE

If an error message remains after a faultybulb has been replaced, contact an author-ised Volvo workshop.



Lamps

06

233

Location of rear bulbs

G01

7457

Lamp lens, right-hand side

Position lamps/brake light (LED)

Side position lights, SML (LED)

Direction indicators

Reflector, rear

Rear fog lamp (one side)

Reversing lamp

Brake light (LED)

Brake light (LED)

Number plate lighting

G01

7458

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

2. Carefully detach the entire lamp housingand withdraw it.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Refit the entire lamp housing and screw itinto place.

Courtesy lighting

G02

1757


1. Insert a screwdriver at the short end of thelens closest to the tunnel console and turngently so that the lens comes loose.(Applies to both lamps).

2. Turn carefully until the lens comes loose.


4. Refit the lens.



Lamps

06

234

Lighting, cargo area

G01

7459

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize sothat the lamp housing comes loose.


3. Check that the bulb illuminates and pressback the lamp housing.

Vanity mirror lighting

Removing the mirror glass

G02

1759

1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the loweredge, in the centre. Carefully prize up thelug on the edge.

2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edgeon the left and right-hand sides (by theblack rubber sections), and prize carefullyso that the glass comes loose in the loweredge.

3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entiremirror glass and cover.


Fitting the mirror glass1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir-

ror glass back into position.

2. Then press the three lower lugs back intoposition.

Specification, bulbs

Lighting Out-put(W)

Type

Extra main beam,Bi Xenon , ABL

55 H7

Dipped beam, hal-ogen

55 H7

Main beam, Halo-gen

65 H9

Front directionindicators

21 H21W

Direction indica-tors, rear

21 PY21W

Front fog lamps 35 H8

Courtesy lighting,cargo area lighting,number plate light-ing

5 Tubularlamp

SV8.5



Lamps

06

235

Lighting Out-put(W)

Type

Vanity mirror 1.2 Tubularlamp

SV5.5

Front position andparking lamps

5 W5W

Front side markerlamps

5 W5W

Glovebox lighting 5 Tubularlamp

SV8.5



Wiper blades and washer fluid

06

236

Wiper blades

Service positionThe wiper blades must be in service position tofacilitate replacement or washing.

1. Turn the remote control key to position 0,see page 71, and keep the remote controlkey in the ignition switch.

2. Move the right-hand stalk switch up forabout 1 second. The wipers then move tostanding straight up.

The wipers return to the starting position whenthe car is started.

Replacing the wiper blades

G02

1760

G02

1761

G02

1762

Turn up the wiper arm. Press the buttonlocated on the wiper blade mounting andpull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"is heard.

Check that the blade is firmly installed.

G02

1763

NOTE

The wiper blades are different lengths. Theblade on the driver's side is longer than theblade on the passenger side.



Wiper blades and washer fluid

06

237

Replacing the wiper blades, rear window

G03

2770

1. Fold out the wiper arm.

2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by thearrow).

3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's endposition against the wiper arm as a lever todetach the blade more easily.

4. Press the new wiper blade into position.Check that it is firmly installed.

5. Lower the wiper arm.

CleaningFor cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, seepage 263.

IMPORTANT

Check the wiper blades regularly.Neglected maintenance shortens the serv-ice life of the wiper blades.

Filling washer fluid

G02

1764

The windscreen and headlamp washers sharea common reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Add washer antifreeze during the winter sothat the fluid does not freeze in the pump,reservoir and hoses.

For capacities, see page 277.



Battery

06

238

Warning symbols on the battery

Use protective goggles

Further information in theowner's manual.

Store the battery out ofthe reach of children.

The battery contains cor-rosive acid.

Avoid sparks and nakedflames.

Risk of explosion.

NOTE

An expended battery must be recycled in anenvironmentally responsible manner - itcontains lead.

Operation• Check that the cables to the battery are

correctly connected and properly tight-ened.

• Never disconnect the battery when theengine is running.

The service life and function of the battery isinfluenced by factors such as the number ofstarts, discharging, driving style, driving con-ditions, climatic conditions etc.

IMPORTANT

Never use a quick charger to charge thebattery.

WARNING

Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas,which is highly explosive. One spark, whichcan be generated if you connect jump leadsincorrectly, is sufficient to make the batteryexplode. The battery contains sulphuricacid, which can cause serious burns. If sul-phuric acid comes into contact with eyes,skin or clothing, flush with large quantitiesof water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seekmedical attention immediately.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if itbecomes discharged repeatedly.



Battery

06

239

Changing

Removal

G02

1765

G02

1766

G02

1767

G02

1768

G02

1769

Switch off the ignition and wait for 5 minutes.

Open the clips on the front cover andremove the cover.

Release the rubber moulding so that therear cover is free.

Remove the rear cover by screwing onequarter turn and lifting it away.

WARNING

Connect and disconnect the positive andnegative cables in the correct sequence.

Detach the black negative cable

Detach the red positive cable

Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-tery

Loosen the screw holding the batteryclamp.

Move the battery to the side and lift it up.

Installation

G02

1771

1. Lower the battery into the battery box.



Battery

06

240

2. Move the battery inward and to the sideuntil it reaches the rear edge of the box.

3. Screw in the battery with the screw in theclamp.

4. Connect the ventilation hose.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).

8. Reinstall the rubber moulding. (SeeRemoval).

9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it withthe clips. (See Removal).



Fuses

06

241

GeneralAll electrical functions and components areprotected by a number of fuses in order to pro-tect the car's electrical system from damage byshort circuiting or overloading.

If an electrical component or function does notwork, it may be because the component's fusewas temporarily overloaded and failed. If thesame fuse fails repeatedly then there is a faultin the circuit. In which case, contact an author-ised Volvo workshop to have the systemchecked.

Changing1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the sideto see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuseof the same colour and amperage.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with anamperage higher than that specified whenreplacing a fuse. This could cause signifi-cant damage to the electrical system andpossibly lead to fire.

Location, fuse boxes

G01

7461

Location of fuse boxes, left-hand drive

If the car is right-hand drive, the fuse boxchanges to under the side of the glovebox.

Under the glovebox

Engine compartment

Cargo area



Fuses

06

242

Engine compartment

G02

5600



Fuses

06


General fuses, engine compartmentOn the inside of the cover are tweezers thatfacilitate the removal and fitting of fuses.

Positions (see preceding illustration)Engine compartment, upper

Engine compartment, front

Engine compartment, lower

These fuses are all located in the engine com-partment box. Fuses in are located under

.

• Fuses 1 – 7 and 42 – 44 are of the "MidiFuse" type and must only be replaced byan authorised Volvo workshop.

• 8 – 15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type andmust only be replaced by an authorisedVolvo workshop.

• 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 are of the "MiniFuse"type.

Pos Function A

Primary fuse CEM KL30A 50

Primary fuse CEM KL30B 50

Primary fuse RJBA KL30 60

Primary fuse RJBB KL30 60

Pos Function A

Primary fuse RJBD KL30 50

Reserve

PTC Air preheater* 100

Reserve

Windscreen wipers 30

Parking heater* 25

Ventilation fan 40

Reserve

ABS pump 40

ABS valves 20

Reserve

Headlamp levelling*(Active Bi-Xenon , Bi-Xenon )

10

Primary fuse CEM 20

Radar, ACC control mod-ule*

5

Pos Function A

Speed related powersteering

5

Engine Control Module(ECM), transm. SRS

10

Heated washer nozzles 10

Vacuum pump I5T 20

Lighting panel 5

Headlamp washers 15

12 V socket, front and rearseat

15

Sunroof*, Roof console/ECC*

5

Relay, engine compart-ment box

5

Auxiliary lamps* 20

Horn 15

Engine Control Module(ECM)

10

Control module, auto-matic gearbox*

15



Fuses

06

244

Pos Function A

Compressor A/C 15

Relay coils 5

Starter motor relay 30

Ignition coils 20

Glow system (5-cyl. die-sel)

10

EGR, VTC, Bypass enginecooling system (4-cyl. die-sel)

10

Engine control module,Throttle petrol

10

Engine control module,Throttle diesel

15

Injection system, Mass airflow sensor

15

Mass air flow sensor (4-cyl. diesel)

10

Engine valves 10

Pos Function A

EVAP, Lambda-sond,Injection (petrol)

15

Lambda-sond (4-cyl. pet-rol, 5-cyl. diesel)

10

Crankcase ventilationheater (5-cyl. petrol)

10

Diesel filter heater, crank-case ventilation heater (4-cyl. diesel)

15

Diesel filter heater, crank-case ventilation heater (5-cyl. diesel)

20

Not used 5

Glow plugs (4-cyl. diesel) 60

Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70

Reserve

Cooling fan (4 – 5-cyl. pet-rol, 4-cyl. diesel)

60

Cooling fan (V8, 6-cyl. pet-rol, 5-cyl diesel)

80



Fuses

06


Under the glovebox

10 11 12 13 141 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

232221201918171615 24 25 26 27 28

G03

2918

1. Fold aside the interior trim covering thefuse box.

2. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.

3. The fuses are accessible.

Positions

Pos Function A

Rain sensor* 5

SRS system 10

ABS brakes, electric park-ing brake

5

Pos Function A

Accelerator pedal*, airheater (PTC), heatedseats*

7,5

Reserve

ICM display, CD & Radio A,RSE system*

15

Steering wheel module 7,5

Reserve

Pos Function A

Main beam 15

Sunroof* 20

Reversing lamps 7,5

Reserve

Fog lamp, front* 15

Windscreen washers 15



Fuses

06


Pos Function A

Adaptive cruise control,ACC*

10

Reserve

Roof lighting, control paneldriver's door/Power pas-senger seat*

7,5

Information display 5

Power driver's seat* 5

Windscreen wiper, rear 15

Remote control keyreceiver, alarm sensors

5

Fuel pump 20

Electric steering lock 20

Reserve

Lock, tank/tailgate 10

Alarm siren, ECC 5

Pos Function A

Start/stop button 5

Brake light switch 5

A Premium.



Fuses

06


Cargo area

G03

2919

The fuse box is located behind the upholsteryon the left-hand side.

Positions

Pos Module (black).Function

A

Control panel, driver's door 25

Control panel, passengerdoor

25

Control panel, rear door, left 25


A

Control panel, rear door,right

25

Reserve

12 V socket, cargo area,refrigerator*

15

Rear window defroster 30

Reserve


A

Trailer socket 2* 15

Power seat driver's side* 25

Trailer socket 1* 40

POT (automatic tailgateopening)*

30



Fuses

06


Pos Module (white).Function

A

Reserve

Control module Four C* 15

Seat heating, driver's sidefront*

15

Seat heating, passenger sidefront*

15

Seat heating right rear* 15

AWD control module 10

Seat heating left rear* 15

Reserve

Power seat passenger side* 25

Keyless drive* 20

Electric parking brake, left 30

Electric parking brake, right 30

Pos Module (blue). Func-tion

A

Display RTI*, parking cam-era*

10

Reserve

Bass speaker* 25

Reserve

Audio amplifier* 25

Audio system A 15

Phone, Bluetooth* 5

-

Reserve

A High Performance and Premium.



Wheels and tyres

06

249

GeneralTyres greatly affect the car's driving characte-ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pres-sure and speed rating are important for how thecar performs.

Direction of rotation

G02

1778

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

Tyres with a tread pattern which are designedto only turn in one direction have the directionof rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre mustalways rotate in the same direction throughoutits lifespan. Tyres should only be switchedbetween front and rear positions, neverbetween left and right-hand sides, or viceversa. If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, thecar's braking characteristics and capacity toforce rain and slush out of the way areadversely affected.

NOTE

Ensure that tyres of the same type anddimensions, and also the same make, arefitted to all four wheels.

Follow the recommended tyre pressuresspecified in the tyre pressure table, seepage 260.

Tyre care

Tyre ageAll tyres older than 6 years old should bechecked by an expert even if they seemundamaged. Tyres age and decompose, evenif they are hardly ever or never used. The func-tion can therefore be affected. This also appliesto spare tyres, winter tyres and tyres saved forfuture use. Examples of external signs whichindicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use arecracks or discoloration.

New tyres

G02

1823

Tyres are perishable. After a few years theybegin to harden at the same time as the frictioncapacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres aspossible when you replace them. This is espe-cially important with regard to winter tyres. Theweek and year of manufacture, the tyre's DOTmarking (Department of Transportation), arestated with four digits, for example 1502. Thetyre in the illustration was manufactured inweek 15 of 2002.

Summer and winter tyresWhen summer and winter wheels are changedthe wheels should be marked with which sideof the car they were mounted on, for exampleL for left and R for right.



Wheels and tyres

06

250

Wear and maintenanceThe correct tyre pressure results in more evenwear, see page 259. Driving style, tyre pres-sure, climate and road condition affect howquickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-ferences in tread depth and to prevent wearpatterns arising, the front and rear wheels canbe switched with each other. A suitable dis-tance for the first change is approx. 5000 kmand then at 10 000 km intervals. Contact anauthorised Volvo workshop if you are uncertainabout tread depth.

Wheels should be stored lying down or hangingup - and not standing up.

WARNING

A damaged tyre can lead to loss of controlof the car.

Tyres with tread wear indicators

G02

1829

Tread wear indicators are narrow treadlessbands across the width of the tread. On theside of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread WearIndicator). When the tyre's tread depth is downto 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in heightwith the tread wear indicators. Change to newtyres as soon as possible. Remember thattyres with little tread depth provide very poorgrip in rain and snow.

Rims and wheel bolts

IMPORTANT

The wheel bolts must be tightened to140 Nm. Overtightening can damage thenuts and the bolts.

Only use rims that are tested and approved byVolvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso-ries. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

Locking wheel boltsLocking wheel bolts can be used on both alu-minium and steel rims.

Winter tyresVolvo recommends winter tyres with particulardimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependenton engine variant. When driving on winter tyres,the correct tyres must be fitted to all fourwheels.

NOTE

Ask a Volvo dealer which rim and tyre typesare most suitable.

Studded tyresStudded winter tyres should be run in gently for500-1000 km so the studs settle properly intothe tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially thestuds, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studdedtyres vary from country to country.



Wheels and tyres

06


Tread depthRoad conditions with ice, slush and low tem-peratures place considerably higher demandson tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there-fore recommends not to drive on winter tyresthat have a tread depth of less than 4 millime-tres.

Using snow chainsSnow chains may only be used on the frontwheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).

Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snowchains. Avoid driving on bare ground as thiswears out both the snow chains and tyres.Never use quick-fit snow chains as the spacebetween the brake discs and the wheels is toosmall.

IMPORTANT

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-lent chains designed for the car model, andtyre and rim dimensions. Consult an author-ised Volvo workshop

Tyre pressure monitoring, TPMS*TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)warns the driver when the pressure is too lowin one or more of the car's tyres. It uses sensorslocated inside the air valve in each wheel.

When the car is driven at about 40 km/h thesystem detects the tyre pressure. If the pres-sure is too low then a warning lamp on theinstrument panel illuminates and a message isshown on the display.

Always check the system after changing awheel in order to ensure that replacementwheels work with the system.

For information on correct tyre pressure, seepage 259.

The system does not replace normal tyre main-tenance.

IMPORTANT

If a fault should arise in the tyre pressuresystem a warning lamp on the instrumentpanel will illuminate. The message TYREPRESS. SYST SERVICE REQUIRED willbe shown. This can be for various reasons,e.g. fitting a wheel not equipped with a sen-sor adapted for Volvo's tyre pressure moni-toring system.

Adjusting tyre pressure monitoringTyre pressure monitoring can be adjusted inorder to follow Volvo's tyre pressure recom-mendations, when driving with a heavy load forexample.

NOTE

The engine must not be running.

Settings are made in the controls in the centreconsole, see page 118.

1. Inflate the tyres to the required pressureand select key position I or II.

2. Select Car settings Tyre pressure

3. Select Calibrate tyre pressure.

4. Press ENTER.

5. Drive the car at least at 40 km/h in total forat least 1 minute.

Rectifying low tyre pressureWhen the message LOW TYRE PRESSCHECK TYRES is shown on the display

1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres.

2. Inflate the tyre(s) to the correct pressure.

3. Drive the car at least at 40 km/h in total forat least 1 minute and check that the mes-sage disappears.



Wheels and tyres

06


Deactivating/activating tyre pressuremonitoring

NOTE

The engine must not be running.

Settings are made in the controls in the centreconsole, see page 118.

1. Select key position I or II.

2. Select Car settings Tyre pressure

3. Select Tyre pressure system and pressENTER.> A X is shown in the display if the system

is activated, the option disappears if thesystem is deactivated.

RecommendationsOnly factory fitted wheels are equipped withTPMS sensors in the valves.

• The temporary spare wheel does not havethis sensor.

• If wheels without TPMS sensors are usedthen TYRE PRESS SYST SERVICEREQUIRED will be shown every time thecar is driven faster than 40 km/h for morethan 10 minutes.

• Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors arefitted to all wheels on the car.

• Volvo recommends that sensors are notmoved between different wheels.

WARNING

When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS,hold the nozzle of the pump directly againstthe valve to avoid damaging the valve.

Driveable punctured tyres*If Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST) havebeen selected then the car is also equippedwith TPMS.

This type of tyre has a specially reinforced sidewall that makes continued driving possibledespite the tyre losing some air. These tyresare fitted on a special rim. (Normal tyres canalso be fitted to this rim).

If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the yel-low TPMS lamp on the instrument panel illu-minates and a message is shown in the textpanel. If this occurs, reduce speed tomax. 80 km/h. The tyre must be replaced assoon as possible.

Drive carefully, in some cases it can be difficultto see which tyre is faulty. In order to establishwhich tyre needs attention, check all four tyres.

WARNING

SST tyres should only be fitted by individu-als with expertise on SST tyres.

SST tyres must only be fitted together withTPMS.

After a fault message on low tyre pressurehas been shown, do not drive faster than80 km/h.

Maximum driving distance to tyre change is80 km.

Avoid hard driving.

SST tyres must be replaced if they are dam-aged or punctured.

Tools

G02

5442



Wheels and tyres

06


A foam block, located in the spare wheel rim,contains all tools. The tools consist of a towingeye, jack* and wheel wrench. The foam blockis screwed into a bracket in the bottom of thespare wheel well.

Jack*The original jack should only be used forchanging wheels. The jack's thread mustalways be well greased.

Spare wheel*The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is onlyintended for temporary use. Replace the sparewheel with a normal wheel as soon as possible.The car's handling may be altered by the useof the spare wheel. The correct tyre pressurefor the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pres-sure table, see page 260.

IMPORTANT

Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a sparewheel on the car.

IMPORTANT

The car must never be driven fitted withmore than one temporary spare wheel.

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheelwell with the outside down. Two foam blocks,one under the spare wheel and one over/insideaffix the spare wheel in position. The upper onecontains all tools.

The same bolt runs through to secure the sparewheel and the foam blocks.

Taking out the spare wheel1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward.

2. Undo the retaining screw.

3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.

4. Lift out the spare wheel.

The lower block does not need to be lifted out.

Tools - returning into place

G02

9336

The tools and jack must be returned to theircorrect places after use. The jack must becranked to the correct position in order to havespace.

The foam block and spare wheel must bereplaced in the reverse order to taking out.

Note that there is an arrow on the upper foamblock. It must point forwards in the car.

IMPORTANT

Tools and jack must be stored in theintended location in the car's cargo areawhen not in use.

NOTE

If the floor hatch is not closed then privacylocking does not work, see page 45.



Wheels and tyres

06


Changing wheels

Removing

G02

4534

Mounting points

Set up the warning triangle, see page 213 if awheel must be replaced at a busy location. Thecar and jack* must be on a firm horizontal sur-face.

1. Apply the parking brake and engage firstgear, or position P if the car has an auto-matic gearbox.

WARNING

Check that the jack is not damaged, that thethreads are thoroughly lubricated and that itis free from dirt.

NOTE

Use the jack belonging to the car.

2. Take out the spare wheel, jack and wheelwrench that are located under the carpet inthe cargo area.

3. Place chocks in front of and behind thewheels which will remain on the ground.Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.

G02

1779

4. (For cars with steel rims.) Prize off thewheel cover with the end of the wheelwrench, or pull it off by hand.

5. Loosen the wheel nuts ½–1 turn anticlock-wise with the wheel wrench.

WARNING

Never position anything between theground and the jack, nor between the jack-ing point and the jack.

6. There are two jacking points on each sideof the car. There is a recess in the plasticcover at each point. Crank the foot of thejack down so it is pressed squarely on theground. Check that the jack sits in theanchorage as illustrated and that the footis positioned vertically under the anchor-age.

7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.Remove the wheel bolts and lift off thewheel.

Installation1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel

and hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Screw in the wheel bolts.

3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannotrotate.



Wheels and tyres

06


G02

1780

4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It isimportant that the wheel bolts are tight-ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Checkthe torque with a torque wrench.

5. Fit on the wheel cover (for cars with steelrims).

NOTE

The hubcap outlet for the valve must belocated over the valve on the rim when fit-ted.

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raisedon the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it israised on the jack.

Park the car so that passengers have the car- or preferably a crash barrier - betweenthem and the road.

Emergency puncture repair*

G02

3309

GeneralThe emergency puncture repair kit is used toseal a puncture as well as to check and adjustthe tyre pressure. It consists of a compressorand a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works asa temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle

must be replaced before its expiration date andafter use.

The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-tured in the tread.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is onlyintended for sealing tyres with a puncture inthe tread.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limitedcapacity to seal tyres which have punctures inthe wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergencypuncture repair kit if they have larger slits,cracks or similar damage.

12 V sockets for the compressor are located bythe centre console in the front, by the rear seatand in the cargo area. Choose the electricalsocket that is nearest the punctured tyre.

Taking out the emergency puncturerepair kitSet up the warning triangle adjacent to a traf-ficked location. The emergency puncturerepair kit is located under the floor in the cargoarea.

1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward.

2. Unscrew the retaining screw.



Wheels and tyres

06


3. Lift away the foam block holding the jackand wheel wrench.

4. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.

Replace the parts after use.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/hafter the emergency tyre repair kit has beenused. The temporarily sealed tyre must bechanged as soon as possible (maximumdriving distance: 200 km).

Overview

G01

4337

Label, maximum permitted speed

Switch

Cable

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Protective cap

Pressure reducing valve

Air hose

Sealing fluid bottle

Pressure gauge

Gloves*

Sealing punctured tyres

G01

4338

For information on the function of the parts, seepreceding illustration.



Wheels and tyres

06

257

1. Open the lid of the emergency puncturerepair kit.

2. Detach the decal for maximum permittedspeed and affix it to the steering wheel.

WARNING

The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In thecase of contact with skin, wash away thefluid with soap and water.

3. Check that the switch is in position 0 andlocate the cable and the air hose.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle seal. The seal is bro-ken when the bottle is screwed in.

4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew thebottle's stopper.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equippedwith a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Screw the bottle into its holder.

6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screwin the air hose valve connection to the bot-tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car withoutsupervision when the engine is running.

7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket andstart the car.

WARNING

Never stand next to the tyre when the com-pressor is running. If cracks or unevennessarise then the compressor must beswitched off immediately. The journeyshould not be continued. Contact anauthorised tyre centre.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressurecan increase up to 6 bar but the pressuredrops after approximately 30seconds.

8. Flick the switch to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor mustnot run for more than 10 minutes.

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

WARNING

If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the holein the tyre is too big. The journey should notbe continued. Contact an authorised tyrecentre.

10. Switch off the compressor to check thepressure on the pressure gauge. Minimumpressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is3.5 bar.

11. Switch off the compressor and unplug thecable from the 12 V socket.

12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fitthe valve cap.

13. As soon as possible, drive approximately3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h sothat the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.

Inflating the tyresThe car's original tyres can be inflated by thecompressor.

1. The compressor must be switched off.Make sure that the switch is in position 0and locate the cable and air hose.

2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screwin the air hose valve connection to the bot-tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.



Wheels and tyres

06

258

WARNING

Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result indanger to life. Never leave the engine run-ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf-ficient ventilation.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car withoutsupervision when the engine is running.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 Vsockets and start the car.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switchto position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor mustnot run for more than 10 minutes.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified onthe tyre pressure decal, (release air usingthe pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-sure is too high.)

6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the airhose and cable.

7. Refit the dust cap.

Rechecking the repair and pressure1. Reconnect the equipment.

2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressuregauge.

• If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre isinsufficiently sealed. The journey shouldnot be continued. Contact a tyre centre.

• If the tyre pressure is higher than1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to thepressure specified on the tyre pressuredecal. Release air using the pressurereducing valve if the tyre pressure is toohigh.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equippedwith a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

3. Switch off the compressor. Detach the airhose and cable. Refit the dust cap.

4. Return the emergency puncture repair kitto the cargo area.

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and hose must bereplaced after use. Replacement must beperformed by an authorised Volvo work-shop.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

Drive to the nearest authorised Volvo work-shop for the replacement/repair of the dam-aged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyrecontains sealing fluid.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/hafter the emergency tyre repair kit has beenused. Contact an authorised Volvo work-shop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maxi-mum driving distance is 200 km). The staffthere can determine whether or not the tyrecan be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Replacing the sealing fluid canisterReplace the bottle when the expiration datehas passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-mentally hazardous waste.



Wheels and tyres

06

259

WARNING

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and naturalrubber-latex.

Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergicreaction in the event of skin contact.

Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.

Store out of the reach of children.

NOTE

Leave the container at a collection point forstoring dangerous waste.

Specifications

Designation of dimensionsThe dimensions are stated on all car tyres.Example of designation:

225/50R17 94 W.

225 Section width (mm)

50 Ratio between section height andwidth (%)

R Radial ply

17 Rim diameter in inches (")

94 Tyre load index

W Speed rating for maximum permittedspeed (in this case 270 km/h).

Speed ratingsThe car is approved as a whole, which meansthat dimensions and speed ratings must notdiffer from those specified on the car's regis-tration document.

The only exception to these conditions is win-ter tyres (both those with metal studs and thosewithout). If such a tyre is chosen, the car mustnot be driven faster than the speed rating of thetyre. (For example, class Q can be driven at amaximum of 160 km/h).

Traffic regulations determine how fast a carcan be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.

Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)

T 190 km/h

H 210 km/h

V 240 km/h

W 270 km/h

Y 300 km/h

NOTE

It is the maximum permitted speed that isstated in the table.

Tyre pressure

G02

1830

The tyre pressure decal on the driver's sidedoor pillar (between front and rear door) showswhich pressures the tyres should have at dif-ferent loads and speed conditions, this is alsospecified in the tyre pressure table, see below.

• Tyre pressure for the car's recommendedwheel dimension

• ECO pressure

• Spare wheel pressure (Temporary Spare)



Wheels and tyres

06

260

NOTE

Temperature differences change tyre pres-sure.

Recommended tyre pressure

VariantV70

Tyre size Speed(km/h)

Load, 1 - 3 persons withoutTPMS

Load, 1 -3 persons

withTPMS

Max. load ECO pres-sure A

Front (kPa) B Rear (kPa) Front/rear (kPa)

Front(kPa)

Rear (kPa) Front/rear(kPa)

6-cyl. 225/55 R 16

225/50 R 17

245/45 R 17

0 – 160 230 210 230 260 260 260

160 + 280 280 280 300 300 -

245/40 R 18 0 – 160 230 210 230 260 260 260

160 + 270 270 270 290 290 -

5-cyl. diesel

185 hp

225/55 R 16

225/50 R 17,

245/45 R 17

0 – 160 220 210 220 260 260 260

160 + 260 260 260 270 270 -

245/40 R 18 0 – 160 230 210 230 260 260 260

160 + 260 260 260 270 270 -



Wheels and tyres

06

261

VariantV70


Load, 1 - 3 persons withoutTPMS

Load, 1 -3 persons

withTPMS

Max. load ECO pres-sure A

Front (kPa) B Rear (kPa) Front/rear (kPa)

Front(kPa)

Rear (kPa) Front/rear(kPa)

4-cyl. diesel

5-cyl. diesel

163 hp

4-cyl./5-cyl.

petrol

4-cyl./5-cyl.

Flexifuel

225/55 R 16

225/50 R 17

245/45 R 17

0 – 160 220 210 220 260 260 260

160 + 260 260 260 270 270 -

245/40 R 18 0 – 160 230 210 230 260 260 260

160 + 260 260 260 270 270 -

205/60 R 16 0 – 160 230 210 230 260 260 260

160 + 270 270 270 290 290 -

Sparewheel C

T 125/80 R 17 max. 80 420 420 420 420 420 -

A Economical driving.B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.C Temporary spare.



Wheels and tyres

06

262

VariantXC70


Load, 1 – 3 persons Max. load ECO pressure A

Front (kPa) B Rear (kPa) Front(kPa)

Rear (kPa) Front/rear (kPa)

6-cyl., 5-cyl. 215/65 R 16

235/55 R 17

235/50 R 18

235/45 R 19

0 – 160 230 230 260 260 260

160 + 240 240 280 280 -

Sparewheel C

T 125/80 R 17 max. 80 420 420 420 420 -

A Economical driving.B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.C Temporary spare.

Fuel economy, ECO pressureAt speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyrepressure for full load is recommended in orderto obtain optimum fuel economy.

Checking the tyre pressureThe tyre pressures must be checked everymonth. This also applies to the car's sparewheel. After several few kilometres of driving,the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Coldtyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-ture as the ambient temperature.

Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con-sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairsthe car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyrepressure that is too low could result in the tyresoverheating and being damaged. Tyre pres-sure affects travelling comfort, road noise andsteering characteristics.

NOTE

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is anatural phenomenon. Tyre pressure alsovaries depending on ambient temperature.



Car care

06

263

Washing the carWash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.Use car shampoo.

• Remove bird droppings from the paintworkas soon as possible. Bird droppings con-tain chemicals that affect and discolourpaintwork very quickly. An authorisedVolvo workshop is recommended for theremoval of any discoloration.

• Hose down the underbody. If using a pres-sure washer, keep the nozzle at least 30 cmfrom the painted surfaces.

• Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt.Do not spray directly onto the locks.

• Wash using a sponge, car shampoo andplenty of lukewarm water.

• Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarmsoap solution or car shampoo.

• Use cold degreasing agent on very dirtysurfaces.

• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois ora water scraper.

WARNING

Always have the engine cleaned by a work-shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine ishot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functional-ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling forexample.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, foglamps and rear lamps may temporarily havecondensation on the inside of the lens. Thisis a natural phenomenon, all outside lightingis designed to withstand this. Condensationis normally vented out of the lamp housingwhen it has been switched on for a time.

Cleaning the wiper bladesAsphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,impair the service life of wiper blades.

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg-ularly with lukewarm soap solution or carshampoo.

Do not use any strong solvents.

Automatic car washesAn automatic car wash is a simple and quickway of washing the car, but it cannot reach

everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom-mended for achieving optimum results.

NOTE

During the first few months a new car mustonly be handwashed. This is because thepaintwork is more sensitive when it is new.

Testing the brakes

WARNING

Always test the brakes after washing thecar, including the parking brake, to ensurethat moisture and corrosion do not attackthe brake linings and reduce braking per-formance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and thenwhen driving long distances in rain or slush.The heat from the friction causes the brake lin-ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thingafter starting in very damp or cold weather.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trimcomponentsA special cleaning agent available from Volvodealers is recommended for cleaning colouredplastic parts, rubber and trim components,such as glossy trim mouldings. When using



Car care

06


such a cleaning agent the instructions must befollowed carefully.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic andrubber.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wearaway or damage the glossy surface.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive mustnot be used.

RimsOnly use cleaning agent recommended byVolvo. Strong rim cleaning agents can damagethe surface and cause stains on chrome-platedaluminium rims.

Polishing and waxingPolish and wax the car if the paintwork is dullor to give the paintwork extra protection.

The car does not need to be polished until it isat least one year old. However, the car can bewaxed during this time. Do not polish or waxthe car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before youbegin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphaltand tar stains using Volvo tar remover or whitespirit. More stubborn stains can be removed

using fine rubbing paste designed for car paint-work.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on thepackaging carefully. Many preparations con-tain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing,protection, lustre sealing or similar coulddamage the paintwork. Paintwork damagecaused by such treatments is not coveredby Volvo warranty.

Cleaning front side windows that havea water-repellent surface*

Never use products such as car wax,degreaser or similar on glass surfa-

ces as this could ruin their water-repellentproperties.

Take care when cleaning so as not to damagethe glass surface.

To avoid damaging glass surfaces whenremoving ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.

There is natural wear of the water-repellentcoating.

Treatment with a special finishing agent avail-able from Volvo dealers is recommended inorder to maintain the water-repellent proper-

ties. This should be used first after three yearsand then each year.

Rustproofing – inspection andmaintenanceThe car received a thorough and completerustproofing at the factory. Parts of the bodyare made of galvanised sheet metal. Theunderbody is protected by a wear-resistantanti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetratingrustproofing fluid was sprayed into theexposed members, cavities, closed sectionsand side doors.

Under normal conditions the rustproofing doesnot require treatment for approximately 12years. After this period, it should be treated atthree-year intervals. Please contact an author-ised Volvo workshop if the car needs furthertreatment.

Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it isimportant to keep the car clean. The car's rust-proofing needs to be checked regularly andtouched-up if necessary in order for it to bemaintained.



Car care

06

265

Cleaning the interiorOnly use cleaning agents and car care prod-ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularlyand follow the instructions included with thecar care product.

Stains on fabric upholstery and roofupholsteryA special fabric cleaning agent, available fromauthorised Volvo dealers, is recommended toavoid impairing the fire retardant qualities ofthe upholstery. Use water and a syntheticdetergent to clean the seatbelts. Make sure theseatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage thefabric upholstery.

Treating stains on leather upholsteryVolvo leather upholstery is chromium-free andapproved in accordance with the Oeko-Tex100 standard.

The leather is refined and processed so that itretains its natural characteristics. It is given aprotective coating, but regular cleaning isrequired in order to maintain both characteris-tics and appearance. Volvo offers a compre-hensive product for the cleaning and treatmentof leather upholstery which, when used in

accordance with the instructions, preservesthe leather's protective coating. After a periodof use the natural appearance of the leather willnevertheless emerge, depending more or lesson the surface texture of the leather. This is anatural maturing of the leather and shows thatit is a natural product.

To achieve best results Volvo recommendscleaning and application of the protectivecream once to four times per year (or more ifrequired). Ask a Volvo dealer about Volvo'sLeather care product.

IMPORTANT

Never use strong solvents. Such productsmay damage fabric, vinyl and leatherupholstery.

IMPORTANT

Note that materials with colour that runswhen dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.)may discolour the upholstery material.

Washing instructions for leatherupholstery1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened

sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.

2. Work the dirt away with gentle circularmovements.

3. Dab accurately with the sponge on thestains. Allow the sponge to absorb thestain. Do not rub.

4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth andallow the leather to dry completely.

Protective treatment of leatherupholstery1. Pour a small amount of the protective

cream on the felted cloth and massage ina thin layer of cream with gentle circularmovements on the leather.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutesbefore use.

The leather has now been given improved pro-tection against stains and improved UV pro-tection.

Treating stains on interior plastic, metaland wood partsA fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightlymoistened with water, available from Volvodealers, is recommended for cleaning interiorparts and surfaces.

Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strongstain removers. A special cleaning agent avail-able from Volvo dealers can be used for moredifficult cleaning.



Car care

06

266

Carpets and cargo areaRemove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning ofthe floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use avacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.

Touching up paintworkPaint is an important part of the car's rust-proofing and should therefore be checked reg-ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damagedpaintwork should be rectified immediately. Themost common types of paintwork damage arestone chips, scratches, and marks on theedges of wings and doors.

Materials• primer in a can

• paint in a can or touch-up pen

• brush

• masking tape

Colour code

G02

1831

It is important that the exact correct colour isused. The product decal specifies the car'scolour code, see page 267.

Repairing stone chips

G02

1832

Before work is begun, the car must be cleanand dry and at a temperature above 15 °C.

1. Apply a piece of masking tape over thedamaged surface. Then remove the tape toremove any loose paint.

2. Stir the primer well and apply using a finebrush or a matchstick. Apply paint using abrush once the primer is dry.

3. For scratches, proceed as above, butmask around the damaged area to protectthe undamaged paintwork.

4. After a few days, polish the touched-upareas. Use a soft rag and a small amountof lapping paste.

NOTE

If the stone chip has not penetrated to thebare metal and there is an undamaged col-our coat, you can paint straight after clean-ing the damaged surface.



Type designations

06

267

Decal location

G03

2087



Type designations

06

268

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicleidentification and engine numbers can facili-tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealerregarding the car and when ordering spareparts and accessories.

Type designation, vehicle identificationnumber, maximum permissible weights,codes for colour and upholstery and typeapproval number.

Label for parking heater.

The engine oil decal specifies oil grade andviscosity.

Engine type designation, component andserial number.

Gearbox type designation and serial num-ber.

Manual gearbox

Automatic gearbox

Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle

Further information on the car is presented inthe registration document.


Identification Number).


Specifications

06

269

Dimensions

G01

7404

V70.

Posi-tion inillus-

tration

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2816

B Length 4823

C Load length, floor,folded seat

1878

D Load length, floor 1089

E Height 1547

Posi-tion inillus-

tration

Dimensions mm

F Front track 1578

G Rear track 1576

H Width 1861

I Width including doormirrors

2106



Specifications

06

270

G01

7405

XC70.

Posi-tion inillus-

tration

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2815

B Length 4838

C Load length, floor,folded seat

1878

D Load length, floor 1089

E Height 1604

Posi-tion inillus-

tration

Dimensions mm

F Front track 1604

G Rear track 1570

H Width 1861

I Width including doormirrors

2119

WeightsKerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank90% full and all fluids. The weight of passen-gers and accessories, such as a towbar, loadcarriers, space box etc. and towball load (whena trailer is hitched, see table) influences thepayload and must not be included in the kerbweight. Permitted weight (in addition to driver)= Gross vehicle weight – Kerb weight.



Specifications

06

271

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics changedepending on how heavily it is loaded andhow the load is distributed.

G01

7755

For information on decal location, see page 267.

Gross vehicle weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 100 kg.

Towing capacity and towball load

Model Gearbox Trailer weight with brake (kg) Towball load (kg)

All All 0 – 1200 50

2.0 MTX75 max. 1500 75



Specifications

06

272


2.0F MTX75 max. 1500 75

2.5FT Manual (M66) max. 1600 75

2.5FT Automatic (TF-80SC) max. 1800 75

2.5T Manual (M66) max. 1800 75

2.5T Automatic (TF-80SC) max. 1800 75

3.2 Automatic (TF-80SC) max. 1800 75

T6 Automatic (TF–80SC) AWD max. 2000 90

2.0D MMT6 max. 1600 75

2.4D Manual (M66) V70 max. 1800 75

2.4D Automatic (TF-80SC) V70 max. 1800 75

2.4D Manual AWD XC70 max. 2100 90

2.4D Automatic AWD XC70 max. 2100 90

D5 Manual (M66) V70 max. 1800 75

D5 Automatic (TF-80SC) V70 max. 2000 90



Specifications

06

273


D5 Manual AWD V70 max. 1800

XC70 max. 2100

V70 75

XC70 90

D5 Automatic AWD V70 max. 2000

XC70 max. 2100

90

Trailer weightwithout brake

(kg)

Towball load (kg)

max. 750 50

NOTE

The use of stabilising devices is recom-mended with trailers heavier than 1800 kg.

Engine specifications

Specification/Model

2.0F 2.0 2.5T 2.5FT A 3.2 T6

Engine designation B4204S4 B4204S3 B5254T6 B5254T8 B6324S B6304T2

Output (kW/rpm) 107/6000 107/6000 147/4800 147/4800 175/6200 210/5600

Output (hp/rpm) 145/6000 145/6000 200/4800 200/4800 238/6200 285/5600

Torque (Nm/rpm) 190/4500 190/4500 300/1500 – 4500 300/1500 – 4500 320/3200 400/1500 – 4800

No. of cylinders 4 4 5 5 6 6

Bore (mm) 87 87 83 83 84 82



Specifications

06

274

Specification/Model

2.0F 2.0 2.5T 2.5FT A 3.2 T6

Stroke (mm) 83.0 83.0 93.2 93.2 96 93.2

Swept volume (litres) 1.99 1.99

Compression ratio 10.8:1 10.8:1 9.0:1 9.0:1 10.8:1 9.3:1

A Only V70.

Specification/Model 2.0D 2.4D D5

Engine designation D4204T D5244T5 D5244T4

Output (kW/rpm) 100/4000 120/4000 136/4000

Output (hp/rpm) 136/4000 163/4000 185/4000

Torque (Nm/rpm) 320/2000 340/1750 – 2750 400/2000 – 2750

No. of cylinders 4 5 5

Bore (mm) 85 81 81

Stroke (mm) 88.0 93.1 93.1

Swept volume (litres) 2.00 2.400 2.400

Compression ratio 18.5:1


17.3:1 17.3:1

2.521 2.521 3.192 2.953


Specifications

06

275

Engine oil

Adverse driving conditionsAdverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.

Check the oil level more frequently for longjourneys:

• towing a caravan or trailer.

• in mountainous regions.

• at high speeds.

• in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hot-ter than +40 °C

• shorter driving distances (shorter than 10km) at low temperatures (under 5 °C).

This can produce abnormally high oil tempera-ture or oil consumption.

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adversedriving conditions. It provides extra protectionfor the engine.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for theengine's service intervals all engines arefilled with a specially adapted syntheticengine oil at the factory. The choice of oilhas been made very carefully with regard toservice life, starting characteristics, fuelconsumption and environmental impact. Anapproved engine oil must be used in orderthat the recommended service intervals canbe applied. Only use a prescribed grade ofoil (see the engine compartment decal) forboth filling and oil change, otherwise youwill risk affecting service life, starting cha-racteristics, fuel consumption and environ-mental impact. Volvo Car Corporation dis-claims all warranty liability if engine oil of theprescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

G02

1834

Viscosity chart



Specifications

06

276

Oil decal

Engine variant Filling volume between MIN–MAX (litres)

Volume A

(litres)

G03

2079

The following applies when this adjacent oildecal is fitted in the car's engine compartment.For location see page 226.

Oil grade: WSS-M2C913-B

Viscosity: SAE 5W–30

When driving under adverse conditions, useACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.

2.0D D4204T 2.0 5.5

A Including filter change



Specifications

06

277

Oil decal

Engine variant Volume between MIN andMAX (litres)

Volume(litres)

G03

2078

The following applies when the adjacent decalis fitted in the car's engine compartment. Forinformation on decal location, see page 226.

Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 0W–30

2.0F B4204S4 0.75 4.3

2.0 B4204S3 0.75 4.3

2.5FT B5254T8 1.3 5.5

2.5T B5254T6 1.3 5.5

3.2 B6324S 1.2 7.4

T6 B6304T2 1.2 7.4

D5 D5244T4 1.5 6.0

2.4D D5244T5 1.5 6.0

Other fluids and lubricants

Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

Gearbox oil Manual (M66) 2.0 Transmission fluid: MTF 97309

Gearbox oil Automatic (TF-80SC) 7.0 Transmission fluid JWS 3309

Gearbox oil MMT6 Transmission fluid: BOT 130

Gearbox oil MTX75 1.9 Transmission fluid: BOT 130


1.7


Specifications

06

278

Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

Coolant Petrol engine 2.0 Coolant with corrosion inhibitormixed with water A, see packaging.

Petrol engine 2.0F

Petrol engine 2.5FT B 9.0

Petrol engine 3.2 8.9

Petrol engine 2.5T 9.0

Petrol engine T6 8.9

Diesel engine 2.0D

Diesel engine D5/2,4D

Air conditioning C - - Oil: PAG

Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a)

Brake fluid - 0.6 DOT 4+

Power steering - 1.2 Power steering fluid WSSM2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid - 6.5D

Use a washer antifreeze recom-mended by Volvo, mixed withwater.

A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.B Only V70.C May vary depending on the engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the exact information.D Cars without headlamp washing


7.55

7.55

9.15

12.65

4.5


Specifications

06

279

NOTE

Under normal driving conditions the gear-box oil does not need changing during itsservice life. However, it may be necessaryunder adverse driving conditions, seepage 275.

Consumption, emissions and volume

Model Engine Gearbox Consumption(litre/100 km)

Emissions of car-bon dioxide(CO2,

g/km)

Tank volume(litres)

2.0 B4204S3 Manual 5-speed(MTX75)

206 approx. 70

2.0F B4204S4 Manual 5-speed(MTX75)

206 approx. 70

2.5FTA

(Environmental carSweden)

B5254T8Manual (M66) 220 approx. 70

2.5FTA

(Environmental carSweden)

B5254T8 Automatic (TF-80SC) 10.2 243 approx. 70

2.5FTA B5254T8 Manual (M66) 224 approx. 70

2.5FTA B5254T8 Automatic (TF-80SC) 247 approx. 70


A 8.6

9.2

9.4

10.4

8.6


Specifications

06

280



g/km)

Tank volume(litres)

2.5T B5254T6 Manual (M66) 227 approx. 70

2.5T B5254T6 Automatic (TF-80SC) 10.2 243 approx. 70

3.2 B6324S Automatic (TF-80SC) 10.5 251 approx. 70

3.2 B6324S Automatic (TF–80SC)AWD

V70 275

XC70 272

approx. 70

T6 B6304T2 Automatic (TF–80SC)AWD

11.3 270 approx. 70

2.0D D4204T MMT6 5.9 157 approx. 70

D5 D5244T4 Manual (M66) 178 approx. 70

D5 D5244T4 Automatic (TF-80SC) 203 approx. 70

D5 D5244T4 Manual (M66) AWD

XC70 199

approx. 70

D5 D5244T4 Automatic (TF–80SC)AWD XC70 8.3

V70 214

XC70 219

approx. 70


6.7

V70 8.1

V70 7.3 V70 194

7.7

9.5

V70 11.5

XC70 11.4

XC70 7.5


Specifications

06

281



g/km)

Tank volume(litres)

2.4D D5244T5 Manual (M66) V70 178

XC70 199

approx. 70

2.4D D5244T5 Automatic (TF-80SC) V70 203

XC70 219

approx. 70

A Flexifuel can be driven on any 95 octane unleaded petrol, or bioethanol E85, as well as all possible mixtures of these two fuels. The car consumes approx. 40% more E85 which has a lower energycontent.

Fuel consumption and emissions ofcarbon dioxideOfficial fuel consumption figures are based ona standard driving cycle in accordance with EUDirective 80/1268comb.

The manner in which the car is driven, andother non-technical factors affect fuel con-sumption. For more information, see page 9.

Electrical system12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter-nator. Single pole system in which the chassisand engine block are used as conductors. Thenegative terminal is connected to the chassis.

IMPORTANT

If the battery is replaced, replace it with abattery of the same cold start capacity andreserve capacity as the original (see thedecal on the battery).

Performance, battery

Engine 2.5T, 2.5FT 2.0, 2.0F, 3.0T, 3.2 2.0D, D5,2.4D

Voltage (V) 12 12 12

Cold start capacity (A) 520 – 800 520 – 700 700

Reserve capacity (min) 100 – 150 100 – 135 135


V70 7.7

V70 6.7

XC70 8.3

XC70 7.5


Type approval

06

282

Remote control system

Country

A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,E, EST, F, FIN, GB,GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,SK, SLO

A

IS, LI, N, CH

HR

ROK Delphi 2003-07-15,Germany R-LPD1-03-0151

BR

RC

CCAB06LP1940T4

A Delphi hereby certifies that this remote control system con-forms to the essential characteristic requirements and otherrelevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.


07 Alphabetical Index

07

283

A

ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 158

Active Bi-Xenon Lights............................ 78

Active chassis – FOUR-C........................ 156

Adaptation................................................. 98

Adapting driving characteristics.............. 156

Adaptive cruise control............................ 158fault tracing......................................... 162radar sensor........................................ 161

Adaptive cruise control fault tracing........ 162

Additional heater...................................... 134

Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 134

Adjusting headlamp pattern...................... 82Active Bi-Xenon headlamps............... 82Bi-Xenon headlamp........................... 82Halogen headlamp............................... 83

Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 76

Airbagactivating/deactivating, PACOS........... 20deactivating/activating......................... 20driver's and front passenger side......... 18

Air conditioning........................................ 127general................................................ 123

Air conditioning, AC................................. 127

Air distribution.................................. 124, 129

Air vents................................................... 125

Alarm.......................................................... 56alarm indicator...................................... 56alarm signals......................................... 56arming................................................... 56checking the alarm............................... 42deactivating.......................................... 56deactivating a triggered alarm.............. 56reduced alarm level.............................. 57temporary disarming of the alarm........ 57testing the alarm system...................... 57

Allergy and asthma inducing sub-stances.................................................... 124

All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 104

All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 104

Approach light, duration............................ 82

Audioheadphones socket............................ 136rear control panel................................ 136settings............................................... 137surround............................................. 135

Audio system........................................... 135functions............................................. 137overview.............................................. 135

Audio volumephone.................................................. 190phone/media player............................ 190ring signal, phone............................... 190

AUTOclimate control settings...................... 127

Automatic car washes............................. 263

Automatic gearbox.................................. 101manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 101towing and recovery........................... 219

Automatic locking...................................... 50

Automatic relocking................................... 50

AUX.......................................................... 135

AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 104

B

Backrest..................................................... 72front seat, lowering............................... 72

Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 74

Battery..................................................... 238maintenance....................................... 238remote control key/PCC....................... 46start assistance..................................... 99



07

284

symbols on the battery....................... 238warning symbols................................. 238

Bioethanol E85......................................... 204

Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 181

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS...... 181

Bluetoothhandsfree............................................ 188mute microphone............................... 190transfer call to mobile......................... 190

Bonnet, opening...................................... 224

Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 227

Brake light.................................................. 79

Brakes...................................................... 105Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 105brake light............................................. 79brake system...................................... 105electric parking brake......................... 109Emergency brake assistance, EBA..... 105emergency brake light, EBL................. 79filling brake fluid.................................. 228symbols in the combined instrumentpanel................................................... 105

Built-in phone.......................................... 193

Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 229

C

Callsfunctions during a call................ 193, 194incoming..................................... 189, 193operation..................................... 189, 193volume in phone................................. 194waiting................................................ 194

Call waiting.............................................. 194

Camera sensor........................................ 169

Car care................................................... 263

Car care, leather upholstery.................... 265

Cargo areacargo cover......................................... 211

81mounting points.................................. 206safety grille.......................................... 209safety net............................................ 210

Cargo cover............................................. 211

Car upholstery......................................... 265

Car wash.................................................. 263

Catalytic converter................................... 203recovery.............................................. 219

Centre console......................................... 118

Chassis settings....................................... 156

Checking and topping up the coolant..... 227

Children..................................................... 29child safety locks.................................. 34child seats and side airbags................. 22location in the car................................. 29safety.................................................... 29

Child safety locks...................................... 55

Child seat................................................... 29

Child seats................................................. 29integrated two-stage booster cushion. 32ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 34recommended...................................... 30size classes for child seats with the ISO-FIX fixture system................................. 34upper mounting points for child seats.. 36

Cigarette lighter socket............................ 186front seat............................................. 187rear seat.............................................. 187

Cleaningautomatic car washes......................... 263car wash............................................. 263rims..................................................... 264seatbelts............................................. 265upholstery........................................... 265

Clean Zone Interior.................................. 124


lighting.................................................


07

285

Climate control........................................ 123general................................................ 123sensors............................................... 123

Clock, setting............................................. 69

Collision..................................................... 28

Collision warning..................................... 167

Collision warning systemradar sensor................................ 161, 167

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*......... 167

Colour code, paint................................... 266

Combined instrument panel.................... 120

Comfort inside the passenger compart-ment......................................................... 185

Compass.................................................. 154calibration........................................... 154setting the zone.................................. 154

Condensation in headlamps.................... 263

Controlscentre console.................................... 118

Crash, see Collision................................... 28

Cruise control.......................................... 157

D

Deadlocks.................................................. 53deactivation.......................................... 53temporary deactivation......................... 53

Defroster.................................................. 128

Diesel....................................................... 204

Diesel particle filter.................................. 205

Direction indicators.................................... 80

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 103

Display lighting.......................................... 77

Distance Alert.......................................... 164

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 135

Door mirrors............................................... 90

Driveable punctured tyres........................ 252

Driver Alert Control.................................. 172

Driver Alert System.................................. 172

Driving...................................................... 200cooling system.................................... 200with the tailgate open......................... 200with trailer........................................... 214

Driving in water........................................ 200

Driving with a trailertowball load........................................ 270towing capacity.................................. 270

DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 155

E

ECC, electronic climate control............... 126

Economical driving.................................. 200

ECO pressure.......................................... 259

Electrical socketcargo area........................................... 187front seat............................................. 187rear seat.............................................. 187

Electric parking brake.............................. 109low battery voltage............................. 109releasing automatically....................... 110releasing manually.............................. 110

Emergency calls....................................... 193

Emergency equipmentwarning triangle.................................. 213

Emergency puncture repair..................... 255

Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 205



07

286

Engineoverheating......................................... 214starting.................................................. 95

Engine block heater................................... 97

Engine braking, automatic....................... 107

Engine compartmentcoolant................................................ 227oil........................................................ 226overview.............................................. 224power steering fluid............................ 228

Engine oil......................................... 225, 275adverse driving conditions.................. 275capacities........................................... 275filter..................................................... 226oil grade.............................................. 275

Error messagesDriver Alert Control............................. 173Lane Departure Warning..................... 176see Messages and symbols............... 162

Error messages in BLIS........................... 183

Error messages in Distance Alert............ 165

Error messages in the Adaptive cruise con-trol............................................................ 162

Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 15

External dimensions................................ 269

F

Fan........................................................... 127

Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 170

First aid equipment.................................. 213

Flexifuel...................................................... 97adaptation............................................. 98

Floor mats................................................ 186

Fog lampfront...................................................... 79

Fog lampsrear........................................................ 79

Fog lamps, on/off....................................... 79

Foot brake................................................ 105

FOUR-C – Active chassis........................ 156

Fuel.......................................................... 203fuel consumption................................ 205fuel economy.............................. 259, 262fuel filter.............................................. 205

Fuse box.................................................. 241glovebox............................................. 245

Fuses....................................................... 241box in cargo area................................ 247changing............................................. 241

general................................................ 241relay/fuse box in engine compart-ment.................................................... 242

Fuse tablefuses in cargo area............................. 247fuses in engine compartment............. 243

G

Gearbox................................................... 100automatic............................................ 101manual................................................ 100

Gear selector inhibitor............................. 103

Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen-gagement................................................. 103

Geartronic................................................ 101

Glasslaminated/reinforced............................. 89

Global opening........................................ 123

Glovebox.................................................. 186Locking................................................. 51

Gross vehicle weight............................... 270



07

287

H

Hazard warning flashers............................ 80

HBS – Heart Beat Sensor.......................... 43

HDC......................................................... 107

Headlamp levelling.................................... 77Active Bi-Xenon headlamps............... 77Bi-Xenon headlamps.......................... 77

Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 82

Headlamps............................................... 229

Headphones socket................................. 136

Head restraintcentre seat, rear.................................... 74lowering................................................ 74

Heated washer nozzles.............................. 87

Heating.................................................... 127rearview and door mirrors.................... 91rear window.......................................... 91seats................................................... 127

High engine temperature......................... 214

High-pressure headlamp washing............. 87

Hill Descent Control................................. 107

HomeLink EU........................................ 112

Home safe lighting..................................... 81

Hoot........................................................... 76

Horn........................................................... 76

I

IAQS – Interior Air Quality System........... 124

IC – Inflatable Curtain................................ 24

IDIS – Intelligent Driver Information Sys-tem........................................................... 195

Ignition keys............................................... 71

IMEI number............................................ 196

Immobiliser................................................ 40

Indicator lamps, PCC................................. 42

Information and warning symbols............. 66

Information button, PCC............................ 42

Information displays.................................. 65

Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 77

Instrument overviewleft-hand drive....................................... 62right-hand drive.................................... 64

Instruments and controls........................... 62

Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 80

Interior rearview mirror............................... 92automatic dimming............................... 92

Intermittent wiping..................................... 86

J

Jack......................................................... 253

K

Kerb weight.............................................. 270

Key............................................................. 40

Key blade................................................... 43

Keyless drive........................................ 48, 95

Keyless start (keyless drive)................. 48, 95

Keylock.................................................... 103

Keypad in the steeringwheel.................................. 76, 118, 157, 193

Key positions............................................. 71



07

288

L

Laminated glass......................................... 89

Lamps, see Lighting................................ 229

Lane Departure Control........................... 175

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 265

Lighting.................................................... 229Active Bi-Xenon Lights, ABL.............. 78approach light, duration....................... 82automatic lighting, passenger compart-ment...................................................... 81bulbs, specifications........................... 234controls................................................. 80display lighting...................................... 77front fog lamps..................................... 79headlamp levelling................................ 77home safe lighting................................ 81in passenger compartment................... 80instrument lighting................................ 77main/dipped beam............................... 77position/parking lamps......................... 78rear fog lamp........................................ 79

Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 229cargo area........................................... 234courtesy lighting................................. 233dipped beam halogen......................... 230direction indicators............................. 231

fog lamp.............................................. 232Lamp housing, rear, direction indica-tors...................................................... 232main beam Active Bi-Xenon............... 231main beam Bi-Xenon.......................... 231main beam halogen............................ 230number plate lighting.......................... 233parking lamps..................................... 231side marker lamps.............................. 232vanity mirror........................................ 234

Light switches............................................ 77

Loadingcargo area........................................... 206general................................................ 206mounting points.................................. 206roof load............................................. 212

Locking/unlockinginside.................................................... 50tailgate............................................ 41, 51

Locksautomatic locking................................. 50Locking................................................. 50unlocking.............................................. 50

M

Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 77

Maintenancerustproofing........................................ 264

Making calls..................................... 189, 193

Manual gearbox....................................... 100towing and recovery........................... 219

Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 101

Memory function in seats.......................... 73

Menus and messages.............................. 118

Messages and symbolsCollision Warning with Auto Brake..... 170Distance Alert..................................... 165Driver Alert Control............................. 173Lane Departure Warning..................... 176

Messages and symbols in the Adaptivecruise control........................................... 162

Messages in BLIS.................................... 183

Messages in the combined instrumentpanel........................................................ 121

Messages in the information display....... 155



07

289

Meters in the combined instrument panelfuel gauge............................................. 66speedometer......................................... 66tachometer........................................... 66

Misting..................................................... 128attending to the windows................... 123condensation in headlamps............... 263remove with the air vents................... 129timer function...................................... 128

Mobile phoneconnect............................................... 191handsfree............................................ 188register phone..................................... 188

MY KEY.................................................... 136

O

Oil, see also Engine oil............................. 275

Oil level low.............................................. 226

Overheating............................................. 214

P

PACOS....................................................... 20

PACOS, switch.......................................... 20

Paintworkcolour code......................................... 266damage and touch-up........................ 266

Panel lighting............................................. 77

Panic function............................................ 41

Parking assistance................................... 178parking assistance sensors................ 180

Parking brake........................................... 109

Parking heater.......................................... 131battery and fuel................................... 131parking on a hill.................................. 131time setting......................................... 132

Particle filter............................................. 205

Passenger compartment......................... 185

Passenger compartment filter................. 124

PCC – Personal Car Communicatorfunctions............................................... 41range............................................... 42, 43

Petrol grade............................................. 203

Phonebuilt-in, overview................................ 193connect............................................... 191handsfree............................................ 188incoming calls..................................... 189making calls........................................ 189

messages........................................... 195on/off.................................................. 193phone book......................................... 191phone book, shortcut......................... 191receiving a call.................................... 190register phone..................................... 188ring signal........................................... 194SIM card............................................. 196

Phone book............................................. 195

Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 94

Polishing.................................................. 264

Position/parking lamps.............................. 78

Power seat................................................. 72

Power sunroof........................................... 93

Power windows......................................... 89

Privacy locking........................................... 45

Puncture, see Tyres................................. 253

Putting calls on hold................................ 194

R

Radar sensor........................................... 158limitations........................................... 161

Rain sensor................................................ 86



07

290

Rear bulbslocation............................................... 233

Rear control panelaudio system...................................... 136

Rearview and door mirrorscompass............................................. 154door...................................................... 90electrically retractable........................... 91heating.................................................. 91interior................................................... 92

Rear window, defrosting............................ 91

Recirculation............................................ 128

Recommendations during driving............ 200

Recommended child seats, table.............. 30

Recovery.................................................. 220

Refrigerant............................................... 123

Refuelling................................................. 202fuel cap............................................... 202fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 202fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 202refuelling............................................. 202

Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 241

Remote controlprogrammable.................................... 112

Remote control, see Remote control key. . 40

Remote control key.................................... 40battery................................................... 41battery replacement.............................. 46detachable key blade........................... 40functions............................................... 41range..................................................... 42

Remote control system, type approval.... 282

Resetting the door mirrors......................... 91

Resetting the power windows................... 90

Retractable power door mirrors................. 91

Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 101five-speed........................................... 100

Rimscleaning.............................................. 264

Rustproofing............................................ 264

S

Safety grille.............................................. 209

Safety mode............................................... 28

Safety net................................................. 210

Seat, see Seats.......................................... 72

Seatbeltrear seat................................................ 15seatbelt tensioner................................. 16

Seatbelt reminder...................................... 15

Seatbelts.................................................... 14

Seats.......................................................... 72head restraints, rear.............................. 74heating................................................ 127lowering the front backrest................... 72lowering the rear backrest.................... 74power seats.......................................... 72ventilated front seats.......................... 126

Securing loads (Loading)......................... 206

Service programme................................. 224

Set time interval....................................... 164

Side airbags............................................... 22

Signal input, external............................... 135

SIM card.................................................. 196

SIPS bag – decal....................................... 23

SIPS bags.................................................. 22

Soot filter................................................. 205

SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 205

Spare wheel............................................. 253Temporary spare................................ 253



07

291

Spin control............................................. 155

Spin control function............................... 155

SRS AIRBAG........................................ 18, 19

SRS system............................................... 17switch................................................... 20

SST – Self Supporting run flat Tyres....... 252

Stability and traction control system....... 155

Stability system........................................ 155

Stains....................................................... 265

Start assistance......................................... 99

Steering force, speed related.................. 156

Steering force level, see Steering force... 156

Steering lock.............................................. 96

Steering wheel........................................... 76keypad.................. 76, 118, 135, 157, 193keypad, adaptive cruise control......... 159steering wheel adjustment.................... 76

Stone chips and scratches...................... 266

Storage spaces in the passenger compart-ment......................................................... 185

Sunroofopening and closing............................. 93pinch protection.................................... 94

sunscreen............................................. 94ventilation position................................ 93

Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 94

Surround.................................................. 135

Symbols................................................... 155indicator symbols................................. 66information symbols............................. 66warning symbols................................... 66

Symbols and messagesCollision Warning with Auto Brake..... 170Distance Alert..................................... 165Driver Alert Control............................. 173Lane Departure Warning..................... 176

Symbols and messages in the Adaptivecruise control........................................... 162

T

Tailgate...................................................... 52locking/unlocking............................ 41, 51open...................................................... 52

Temperatureactual temperature............................. 123

Temperature control................................ 127

Testing the alarm system........................... 57

Timer........................................................ 128

Tools........................................................ 253

Total airing function........................... 42, 123

Towballinstallation........................................... 216removal............................................... 218

Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 215

Towing..................................................... 219towing eye.......................................... 219

Towing capacity....................................... 270

Towing equipment................................... 215specifications...................................... 216

Towing eye............................................... 219

TPMS – Tyre Pressure Monitoring........... 251

Trailer....................................................... 214cable................................................... 214driving with a trailer............................ 214

Transmission............................................ 100

Trip computer.......................................... 152

Trip meter.................................................. 69

Type approved, remote control system... 282

Type designation..................................... 267



07

292

Tyresdirection of rotation............................ 249driving characteristics......................... 249maintenance....................................... 249pressure.............................................. 259puncture repair................................... 255specifications...................................... 259speed ratings...................................... 259tread wear indicators.......................... 250tyre pressure monitoring..................... 251winter tyres......................................... 250

U

Unlockingfrom the inside...................................... 50from the outside................................... 50

V

Vanity mirror....................................... 81, 187

Ventilation................................................ 124

Vibration damper..................................... 215

W

Warning lampadaptive cruise control....................... 158collision warning system.................... 167stability and traction control system. . 155

Warning lampsairbags SRS.......................................... 67alternator not charging......................... 67fault in brake system............................ 67low oil pressure..................................... 67parking brake applied........................... 67seatbelt reminder.................................. 67warning................................................. 67

Warning soundcollision warning system.................... 167

Warning symbol, AIRBAG system............. 17

Warning triangle....................................... 213

Washer fluid, filling................................... 237

Washer nozzles, heated............................. 87

Washersrear window.......................................... 87washer fluid, filling.............................. 237windscreen........................................... 87

Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 89

Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 264

Waxing..................................................... 264

Weightskerb weight......................................... 270

Wheelschanging............................................. 254installation........................................... 254rims..................................................... 250snow chains........................................ 251spare wheel........................................ 253

Wheels and tyres..................................... 249

Whiplash injury........................................... 25

Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 25

WHIPSchild seat/booster cushion................... 25whiplash injury...................................... 25

Windows, rearview and door mirrors......... 89

Windscreen washing.................................. 87

Windscreen wipers.................................... 86rain sensor............................................ 86

Winter driving........................................... 201

Winter tyres.............................................. 250

Wiper blades............................................ 236changing............................................. 236cleaning.............................................. 237



07

293

replacing, rear window....................... 237service position................................... 236

Wipers and washing.................................. 86



07

294


Notes

295


Notes

296


owners manual - az685612.vo.msecnd.netaz685612.vo.msecnd.net/.../v70_xc70_ownersmanual_en.pdf ·...

Documents